Technical Specifications

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SITE DEVELOPMENT
65-HECTARE
Project Location: New Clark City
Site Development of the 65-Hectare in New Clark City
Page 1
SCOPE OF WORK
The construction procedures shall be done in accordance with the latest DPWH Standard
Specifications and in full compliance with the approved plans and specifications.
Pertinent notes appearing in the Contract Plans or Drawings shall also be considered as part and parcel
of the technical specifications. Such notes shall take precedence over the General Specifications.
PART A. FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
A.1.1 CONSTRUCTION OF OFFICES AND LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER INCLUDING

SUPPLY OF ALL NEEDED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, CONSUMABLES,
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, AND MAINTENANCE OF THE FACILITIES
A.1.1 (1) Construction of Combined Field Office, Laboratory and Living Quarters Building for
the Engineer
A.1.1 (11) Provision for Furniture/ Fixtures, Equipment and Appliances for the Living Quarters
for the Engineer
A.1.1 (14) Provision for Laboratory Testing Equipment, Apparatus and Publications for the
Engineer
A.1.1 (15) Operation and Maintenance of Temporary Field Office, Laboratory and Living
Quarters for the Engineer
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain field offices and testing laboratories, including all
the necessary electricity, water, drainage, and telephone services for the use of the Engineer
and his staff. The offices and laboratories shall have at least the floor area prescribed on the
Plans and shall contain the equipment, supplies and furnishings specified in the Contract.
Testing equipment supplied in accordance with the Special Provisions shall be located in testing
laboratories as required by the Engineer. All offices and laboratories shall be ready for
occupancy and use by the Engineer within two (2) months of the commencement of the Works.
Their location and final plan shall require the approval of the Engineer prior to the start of
construction. It is the intent of this Specification to locate the field offices and laboratories in
government owned lots so that the use by the government of these facilities can be maximized
even after the completion of the project.
All facilities provided by the Contractor shall be near the job site, where necessary and shall
conform to the best standard for the required types. On completion of the Contract, the facilities
provided by the Contractor including utilities and communication facilities shall revert to the
Government including office equipment, apparatus, pieces of furniture, laboratory equipment,
etc., unless otherwise specified in the Contract documents.
The Contractor shall be responsible for raising the ground (if necessary), grading and drainage
in the vicinity of each facility with suitable access walkways, seeding and sodding of the ground
around as directed and approved by the Engineer. Also, the Contractor shall construct a parking
area for the compound near the buildings and a satisfactory access road to the parking areas.
Page 2
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection of all facilities to be
provided during the duration of the Contract, including providing adequate stock of all
expendable items, such as light bulbs, light tubes, laboratory equipment and supplies at all times
to ensure proper and continuous functioning of all the Engineer’s facilities.
The whole area of the Engineer’s compound shall be fenced with barbed wire (or equivalent)
with necessary gates as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide suitable utilities and services, such as potable water, electricity,
sewerage, and security on a 24-hourbasis.
2. The Contractor shall provide qualified and experienced laboratory staff to carry out all the
materials quality control and all the tests specified in the Contract and required by the Engineer.
The person appointed by the Contractor to manage the laboratory shall be well experienced in
the type of work to be undertaken and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. He shall
work full time and shall be responsible to the Engineer for all works carried out.
3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain the communication facilities for the exclusive use
of the Engineer and Engineers representative as listed below:
DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT
Equipment
A. Telephone Landline with internet (Subscription 1 each

and installation Fee Inclusive)
B. Cellular Phone
Standard Cellular Phone 14 Each
In order to have continuous operation and efficient maintenance of the equipment, the
Contractor shall provide monthly operating expenses including cost for servicing and minor
repairs.
The Contractor shall provide the communication facility/ equipment within thirty (30) days from
the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
4. Any portable offices required in the Contract shall be dismantled, moved, and erected from
time to time as directed by the Engineer.
5. All offices, stores, and testing laboratories shall be proficiently guarded at all times of the day
and night, regularly and properly cleaned, adequately supplied and maintained for the duration
of the Contract.
A.1.2 PROVISION OF VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER INCLUDING PROVISION OF FUELS AND
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
A.1.2 (2) Provision for 4x4 Pick Up Type Service for the Engineer (Rental Basis) (4 units)
The Contractor shall provide within thirty (30) calendar days after notice to commence work,
the vehicles listed in the Special Provisions for the exclusive use of the Engineer. The vehicles
to be provided by the Contractor shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All vehicles shall
Page 3
comply in all respects with all relevant Philippine national or local laws statutes and regulations.
All vehicles shall carry or be fitted with the accessories as may be prescribed by laws and have
comprehensive insurance. The vehicles on delivery shall be new and shall be driven by a
competent qualified and experienced driver who shall be under the direct order of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain the vehicle in first class condition and shall be supplied with
appropriate fuel and lubricants at all times.
The Contractor shall provide equivalent substitute vehicles during any period when the specified
vehicles are taken out of service for maintenance, repair or any other reason. Unless otherwise
specified, the vehicle shall at the end of the Contract become the property of the Government.
A.1.4 PHOTOGRAPHS
A.1.4 (1) Provision of Progress Photographs
The Contractor shall provide record photographs taken as, when, and where directed by the
Engineer at intervals of not more than one month. The photographs shall be sufficient in number
and location to record the exact progress of the Works. The Contractor shall provide one proof
print of each photograph taken, and the negative and ten copies, not less than 254 mm x 203
mm and printed on glossy paper, of any of the photographs by the Engineer. The photographs
retained by the Engineer will become the property of the Government and the Contractor shall
supply approved albums to accommodate them. Two copies are to be signed by the Contractor,
one of which will be signed by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor.
PART B. OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B.1 Offices, Shops, Stores, and Workmen’s Accommodation for Contractor
The Contractor shall provide and maintain such offices, stores, workshops latrines, housing,
and messing accommodations as necessary. These shall be located in the Contractor’s
compound, distinct, and separate from the Engineer’s compound. The location, dimensions,
and layout of such buildings and places shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall not be permitted to erect temporary buildings or structures on the site without
the specific permission in writing of the Engineer including approval of the dimensions of such
buildings or structures. Before the commencement of the period Warranty, the contractor shall
fence off the Contractor’s store area from the rest of the site. By the end of the P
B.4 (1) Construction Survey and Staking
B.4 (2) Slope, reference, and Clearing and Grubbing Stakes
B.4 (3) Centerline Reestablishment
B.4 (6) Retaining Wall Survey and Staking
B.4 (7) Grade Finishing Stakes
B.5 Project Billboard and Signage
B.7 (1) Occupational Safety and Health Program
Page 4
1. Description
This item shall consist of furnishing the necessary equipment and material to survey,
stake, calculate, and record data for the control of work in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the
Plans or as established by the Engineer.
2. Construction Requirements
A. General
Staking activities shall be included in the construction schedule to be submitted by the

Contractor. Dates and sequence of each staking activity shall be included.
The Engineer shall set initial reference lines, horizontal and vertical control points, and
shall furnish the data for use in establishing control for the completion of each element
of the work. Data relating to horizontal and vertical alignments, theoretical slope stake
catch points, and other design data shall be furnished.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true settling of the works or improvements
and for correctness of positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the
works. He shall provide all necessary instruments, appliances, materials and supplies,
and labor in connection therewith. The Contractor shall provide a survey crew supervisor
at the project site whenever surveying/staking activity is in progress.
Prior to construction, the Engineer shall be notified of any missing initial reference lines,
controls, points, or stakes. The Engineer shall reestablish missing initial reference lines,
controls, points, or stakes.
The Contractor for convenient use of Government-furnished data shall perform

additional calculations. Immediate notification of apparent errors in the initial staking or
in the furnished data shall be provided.
All initial reference and control points shall be preserved. At the start of construction, all
destroyed or disturbed initial reference or control points necessary to the work shall be
replaced.
Before surveying and staking, the Contractor shall discuss and coordinate the following
with the Engineer:
a. Surveying and staking methods
b. Stake marking/concrete monuments
Table 1
CONSTRUCTION SURVEY AND STAKING TOLERANCES111
Staking phase Horizontal Vertical
Page 5
Existing Government network control point ±20 mm ±8 mm x VK<2)
Local supplemental control points set from
existing Government network points ±10 mm ±3 mm x VN(3)
Centerline points (4)- (PC), (PT), (POT),
and (POC) including references ±10 mm ±10 mm
Other centerline points ±50 mm ±50 mm
Cross-section points and slope stakes ±50 mm ±50 mm
Slope stakes references Culverts, ditches, ±50 mm ±50 mm
and minor drainage
structures ±50 mm ±20 mm
Retaining walls and curb and gutter ±20 mm ±10 mm
Bridge substructures ±10 mm(6) ±d0 mm
Bridge superstructures ±10 mm(6> ±10 mm
Clearing and grubbing limits ±500 mm -
Roadway subgrade finish stakes <7) ±50 mm ±10 mm
Roadway finish grade stakes <7) ±50 mm ±10 mm
c. Grade control for courses of material
d. Referencing
e. Structure control
f. Any other procedures and controls necessary for the work
Established controls shall be within the tolerances shown in Table 1.
(1) At 95% confidence level. Tolerances are relative to existing Government

network control points.
(2) K is the distance in kilometers.
(3) N is the number of instrument setups.
(4) Centerline points: PC - point of curve, PT - point of tangent, POT - point on

tangent, POC - point on curve
Page 6
(5) Take the cross-sections normal to the centerline + 1 degree.
(6) Bridge control is established as local network and the tolerances are relative
to that network.
(7) Include pave ditches.
The Contractor shall prepare field notes in an approved format. All field notes
and supporting documentation shall become the property of the government
upon completion of the work.
Work shall only be started after shaking for the affected work is accepted.
The construction survey and staking work may be spot-checked by the Engineer
for accuracy and unacceptable portions of work may be rejected. Rejected work
shall be resurveyed and work that is not within the tolerances specified in Table
1 shall be corrected. Acceptance of the construction staking shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for correcting errors discovered during the work and
for bearing all additional costs associated with the error, unless such error is
based on incorrect data supplied in writing by the Engineer, in which case, the
expense in rectifying the same shall be at the expense of the Government.
In the case of “change" or “changed conditions" which involve any change in

stakeout, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and facilitate the
prompt reestablishment of the field control for the altered or adjusted work.
All flagging, lath, stakes, and other staking materials shall be removed and
disposed after the project is completed.
B. Equipment
Survey instruments and supporting equipment capable of achieving the specified

tolerances shall be furnished.
Acceptable tools, supplies, and stakes of the type and quality normally used in highway
survey work and suitable for the intended use shall be furnished. Stakes and hubs of
sufficient length to provide a solid set in the ground with sufficient surface area above
ground for necessary legible markings shall also be furnished.
C. Survey and Staking Requirements
All survey, staking, recording of data, and calculations necessary to construct the project
from the initial layout to final completion shall be performed. Stakes shall be reset as
many times as necessary to construct the work.
a. Control Points
Established initial horizontal and vertical control points in conflict with

construction shall be relocated to areas that will not be disturbed by construction
operations. The coordinates and elevations for the relocated points shall be
furnished before the initial points are disturbed.
b. Roadway Cross-Sections
Page 7
Roadway cross-sections shall be taken normal or perpendicular to the centerline.
When the centerline horizontal vertical parabolic curve radius is less than or
equal to 100 meters, cross-sections shall be taken at a maximum centerline
spacing of 10 meters. When the centerline horizontal curve radius is greater than
150 meters and vertical parabolic curve radius is greater than 100 meters, cross-
sections shall be taken at a maximum centerline spacing of 20 meters. Additional
cross-sections shall be taken at significant breaks in topography and at changes
in the typical roadway section including transition change to super elevated
sections. Along each cross-section, points shall be measured and recorded at
breaks in topography and at changes in typical roadway section including
transition change to super elevated sections and shall be no further apart than 5
meters. Points shall be measured and recorded to at least the anticipated slope
stake and reference locations. All cross-section distances shall be reduced to
horizontal distances from centerline.
c. Slope Stakes and References
Slope stakes and references shall be set on both sides of centerline at the cross-
section locations. Slope stakes shall be established in the field as the actual
point of intersection of the design roadway slope with the natural ground line.
Slope stake references shall be set outside the clearing limits. All reference point
and slope stake information shall be included on the reference stakes. When
initial references are provided, slope stakes may be set from these points with
verification of the slope stake location with field measurements. Slope stakes on
any section that do not match with the staking report within the tolerances
established in Table 1 shall be recatched. Roadway cross-section data shall be
taken between centerline and the new slope stake location. Additional
references shall be set even when the initial references are provided.
d. Clearing and Grubbing Limits
Clearing and grubbing limits shall be set on both sides of centerline at roadway
cross-section locations, extending one (1) meter beyond the toe of the fill slopes
or beyond rounding of cut slopes as the case maybe for the entire length of the
project unless otherwise shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
e. Centerline Reestablishment
Centerline shall be reestablished from instrument control points. The maximum

spacing between centerline points shall be 10 meters when the centerline
horizontal curve radius is less than or equal to 150 meters and vertical parabolic
curve radius is less than or equal to 100 meters. When the centerline horizontal
curve radius is greater than 150 meters and vertical parabolic curve radius is
greater than 100 meters, the maximum distance between centerline points shall
be 20 meters.
f. Grade Finishing Stakes
Grade finishing stakes shall be set for grade elevations and horizontal alignment,
at the centerline and at each shoulder of roadway cross-section locations.
Stakes shall be set at the top of subgrade and the top of each aggregate course.
Page 8
Where turnouts are constructed, stakes shall be set at the centerline, at each
normal shoulder, and at the shoulder of the turnout. In parking areas, hubs shall
be set at the center and along the edges of the parking area. Stakes shall be set
at all ditches to be paved.
The maximum longitudinal spacing between stakes shall be 10 meters when the
centerline horizontal curve radius is less than or equal to 150 meters and vertical
parabolic curve radius is less than or equal to 100 meters. When the centerline
horizontal curve radius is greater than 150 meters and vertical parabolic curve
radius is greater than 100 meters, the maximum longitudinal spacing between
stakes shall be 20 meters. The maximum transverse spacing between stakes
shall be 5 meters. Brushes or guard stakes shall be used at each stake.
g. Culverts
Culverts shall be staked to fit field conditions. The location of culverts may differ
from the plans. The following shall be performed:
g.1 Survey and record the ground profile along the culvert centerline
including inlet and outlet channel profile of at least 10 meters and as
additionally directed by the Engineer so as to gather all necessary data
for the preparation of pipe projection plan.
g.2 Determine the slope catch points at the inlet and outlet.
g.3 Set the reference points and record information necessary to

determine culvert length and end treatments.
g.4 Plot into scale the profile along the culvert centerline reflecting the
natural ground elevation, invert elevation, the flow line, the roadway
section, and the size, length and the degree of elbow of culvert, end
treatments, grade and other appurtenances.
g.5 Plot into scale the cross-section of inlet and outlet channel at not
more than 5 meters interval.
g.6 Submit the plotted Pipe Projection Plan for approval of final culvert
length, alignment and headwall.
g.7 When the Pipe Projection Plan has been approved, set drainage
culvert structure survey and reference stakes, and stake inlet and outlet
to make the structure functional.
h. Bridges
Adequate horizontal and vertical control and reference points shall be set for all
bridge structure and superstructure components. The bridge chord or the bridge
tangent shall be established and referenced. The centerline of each pier, bent,
and abutment shall also be established and referenced.
Set at least three (3) reference points each at downstream and upstream portion.
Conduct topographic survey and plot into scale at least 100 meters upstream
and downstream from centerline of bridge.
Page 9
i. Retaining Walls and Other Types of Slope Protection Works
Profile measurements along the face of the proposed wall and 2 meters in front
of the wall face shall be surveyed and recorded. Cross-sections shall be taken
within the limits designated by the Engineer at every 5 meters along the length
of the wall and all major breaks in terrain. For each cross-section, points shall be
measured and recorded every 5 meters and at all major breaks in terrain.
Adequate references and horizontal and vertical control points shall be set.
j. Borrow and Waste Sites
The work essential for initial layout and measurement of the borrow or waste site
shall be performed. A referenced baseline, site limits, and clearing limits shall be
established. Initial and final cross-sections shall be surveyed and recorded.
k. Permanent Monuments and Markers
All survey and staking necessary to establish permanent monuments and

markers shall be performed.
l. Miscellaneous Survey and Staking
All surveying, staking, and recording of data essential for establishing the layout
and control of the following shall be performed, as applicable:
l.1 Approach roads and trails
l.2 Road Right of Way and Construction limit in accordance with the
approved Parcellary Plan.
l.3 Curb and gutter
l.4 Guardrail
l.5 Parking areas
l.6 Paved waterways and outfall structures
l.7 Lined canals and other ditches
l.8 Chutes and Spillways
l.9 Turf establishment
l.10 Utilities
l.11 Signs, delineators, and object markers
l.12 Pavement markings
3. Method of Measurement
Construction survey and staking shall be measured by the kilometer.
Page 10
Bridge survey and staking, and retaining wall survey and staking shall be measured by
the lump sum.
Slope, reference, and clearing and grubbing stakes shall be measured by the kilometer.
Centerline establishment shall be measured by the kilometer. Centerline

reestablishment shall be measured only one time.
Culvert survey and staking shall be measured by the each.
Grade finishing stakes shall be measured by the kilometer. Subgrade shall be

measured one time and each aggregate course shall also be measured one time.
Permanent monuments and markers shall be measured by each unit placed and
installed at the proper locations.
Miscellaneous survey and staking shall be measured by the hour of survey work ordered
or by the lump sum. For miscellaneous survey and staking paid by the hour, the
minimum survey crew size shall be 2 persons. Time spent in making preparations,
travelling to and from the project site, performing calculations, plotting cross sections
and other data, processing computer data, and other efforts necessary to successfully
accomplish construction survey and staking shall not be measured separately but
deemed included as subsidiary for each of the Pay Item.
PART C. EARTHWORKS INCLUDING COMPLETE SUPPLY OF ALL NEEDED EQUIPMENT,

TOOLS, CONSUMABLES, AND CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION
ITEM 100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
100(1) CLEARING AND GRUBBING
1. Description
This section shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing, and disposing of all vegetation
and debris within the limits of the project site, including the borrow site, as designated in
the Contract except those objects that are designated to remain in place or are to be
removed in consonance with other provisions of this specification. The work shall also
include the preservations from injury or defacement of all objects designated to remain.
A. General
The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all trees, shrubs, plants,
and other things to remain if there are any.
B. Protection of Existing Utilities
Contact the Engineer at least 72 hours prior to construction for the location of all
existing underground utilities. Movement of construction machinery and equipment
over pipes and utilities during grading shall be at the Contractor's risk. For exposing
a utility or other buried obstruction, use hand or light equipment for excavation.
Start hand or light equipment stripping on each side of the indicated obstruction
Page 11
and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade
is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work as affected by the
contract grading until approval for filling is granted by the Engineer. Report damage
to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Engineer. It will be the
responsibility and expense of the Contractor to repair and restore the damage to
its original state or even better.
C. Clearing and Grubbing
All surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructions,
not designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed, including mowing as
required, except as provided below:
a. Removal of undisturbed stumps and roots and non-perishable solid

objects with a minimum of 900mm (36 inches) below natural ground
surface.
b. Grubbing of pits, channel changes, and ditches will be required only to

the depth necessitated by the proposed excavation within such areas.
c. In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment areas,

stumps and non-perishable solid objects shall be cut off not more than
150mm (6 inches) above the ground line or low water level. However, trees
in these areas shall not be cut or removed.
Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from which
obstructions are removed shall be backfilled with suitable material and
compacted to the required density.
If perishable material is burned, it shall be burned under the constant care

of competent watchman at such times and in such a manner that the
surrounding vegetation, and other adjacent property or anything
designated to remain within the limits of the property will not be jeopardized.
If permitted, burning shall be done in accordance with applicable laws,
ordinances, and regulations.
Materials and debris which cannot be burned and perishable material may
be disposed of by methods and at locations approved by the Engineer on
or off the project site. If the disposal location is outside the project area, the
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the property owner
or owners in writing for obtaining suitable disposal locations. The cost
involved shall be included in the unit bid price. A copy of such agreement
shall be furnished to Owner or Engineer.
D. Method of Measurement
The work to be paid shall be the number of square meters and fractions thereof
acceptably cleared and grubbed within the limits indicated on the plans.
100(3)a1 INDIVIDUAL REMOVAL OF TREES (small a, 150-300mm Ø)
1. Trees
Page 12
Comply with Department of Environment and Natural Resources (DENR)
regulations for protection of natural resources.
ITEM 101 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTION
101(3)a3REMOVAL OF ACTUAL STRUCTURES/OBSTRUCTION (PCCP, 0.23m thick)
All concrete pavement, base course, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc., designated for
removal shall be:
1. Broken into pieces and used for riprap on the project, or
2. Broken into pieces, the size of which shall not exceed 300 mm (12 inches) in any
dimension and stockpiled at designated locations on the project for use by the
Government, or
3. Otherwise demolished and disposed off as directed by the Engineer. When

specified, ballast, gravel, bituminous materials or other surfacing or pavement
materials shall be removed and stockpiled as required in Subsection 101.2.1,
otherwise such materials shall be disposed off as directed.
There will be no separate payment for excavating for removal of structures and
obstructions or for backfilling and compacting the remaining cavity.
101(4)d.1REMOVAL OF ACTUAL STRUCTURES/OBSTRUCTION (Existing Structures -

Concrete)
101(4)d.2 REMOVAL OF ACTUAL STRUCTURES/OBSTRUCTION (Existing Structures -

Wood)
101(4)e REMOVAL OF ACTUAL STRUCTURES/OBSTRUCTION (Existing Perimeter Fence -

CHB)
1. GENERAL
A. Scope
This section includes demolition and removal of existing work in the way of new
construction.
B. References
a. The National Building Code of the Philippines
b. Department of Environmental and Natural Resources
C. General Requirements
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Owner or Engineer.
Remove rubbish and debris from the project site. Store materials that cannot be
removed daily in areas specified by the Engineer.
D. Submittals
Page 13
a. Demolition plan
Submit proposed demolition and removal procedures to the Engineer for

approval before work is started. Include procedures for careful removal and
disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other
work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, and a detailed
description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and
of the sequence of operations.
E. Regulatory and Safety Requirements
Comply with local hauling and disposal regulations.
F. Dust and Debris Control
Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a nuisance or
hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or
objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, flooding or pollution.
G. Protection
a. Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and driver safety are endangered in the area of removal
work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Anchor barricades in a
manner to prevent displacement. Notify the Engineer prior to beginning
such work.
b. Existing Work
Protect existing work which is to remain in place, be reused, or remain the

property of the Owner. Repair items which are to remain and which are
damaged during performance of the work to their original condition, or
replace with new ones. Provide new supports and reinforcement for
existing construction weakened by demolition or removal work. Repairs,
reinforcement, or structural replacement must have Engineer’s approval.
c. Weather Protection
For portions of a building to remain, protect building interior and materials

and equipment from the weather at all times. Where removal of existing
roofing is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and workmen
ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of exposed areas so as
to ensure effectiveness and to prevent displacement.
d. Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of

existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved
barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services
or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities.
H. Burning
Page 14
Burning will not be permitted. Where burning is permitted, adherence to local
regulations shall be required.
I. Relocations
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated. Repair

items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged items with new
undamaged items as approved by the Engineer.
2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS (Not Applicable)
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIRMENTS
A. Existing Facilities to be Removed
a. Structures
Remove indicated existing structures to grade to new finished grade.
ITEM 102 EXCAVATION
102(2) Surplus Common Excavation
1. Description
ThisItemshallconsistofroadwayanddrainageandborrowexcavationandthedis
posal of material in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with
the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the
Engineer.
2. Roadway Excavation
Roadway excavation will include excavation and grading for roadways,

parking areas, intersections, approaches, slope rounding, benching,
waterways and ditches; removal of unsuitable material from the road bed
and beneath embankment areas; and excavating selected material found in
the roadway as ordered by the Engineer for specific use in the improvement.
Roadway excavation will be classified as “unclassified excavation”, “rock
excavation”, “common excavation”, or “muck excavation” as indicated in the
Bill of Quantities and hereinafter described.
a. Common Excavation. Common excavations shall consist of all

excavation not included in the Bill of Quantities under “rock
excavation” or other pay items.
ITEM 103 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
103(1)a Structure Excavation (Common Soil)
1. GENERAL
Page 15
This section shall include the use of shoring, sheeting, bracing and all the other excavation
support system required during trench excavations for structures and pipes as specified
and directed herein.
2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General
The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain such sheeting, shoring, bracing
and other support system as may be required to support the sides of trench or
structural excavations, to prevent any earth movement which could diminish the
excavation width to below that necessary for construction, and to protect adjacent
structures from damage. The Engineer may direct that additional trench supports
be installed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, should the existing
supports be deemed insufficient. Provision of additional supports (or acceptance
of existing supports) shall not relieve the Contractor of his sole responsibility for the
provision of adequate support of excavations, especially for the protection of
workmen.
B. Placement and Removal
Sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be placed to avoid the formation of voids
outside of the excavation, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled
with compacted sand. The Contractor shall leave sheeting, shoring and bracing,
in place to be embedded in the backfill if directed to do so by the Engineer. The
Engineer may direct that sheeting and bracing be cut off at any specified elevation
and left in place. The Contractor will be paid for sheeting left in place in accordance
with the specifications. All sheeting not left in place shall be removed cautiously in
the presence of the Engineer to prevent damage to the construction or nearby
structures. Any voids formed by removal of sheeting shall be filled with structural
fill or as directed by the Engineer. Wood sheeting shall not be withdrawn if driven
below the spring line of a pipe, and any wood sheeting shall be cut off no lower
than one foot above the top of any pipe.
C. Responsibility
Failure by the Engineer to direct that sheeting, shoring or bracing shall be left in
place, will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage caused
by removal of sheeting, whether due to his negligence or not. The Contractor is
fully responsible for providing a safe working condition for his and other
employees working on the site.
ITEM 104 EMBANKMENT
104(1)a Embankment from Roadway Excavation
1. Description
This Item shall consist of the construction of embankment in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the
Plans or established by the Engineer.
Page 16
2. MaterialRequirement
Embankments shall be constructed of suitable materials, in consonance with the

following definitions:
1. Suitable Material – Material which is acceptable in accordance with the

Contract and which can be compacted in the manner specified in this
Item.It can be common material, unless under structural fill shall be used.
Selected Borrow, for topping – soil of such gradation that all particles will
pass a sieve with 75 mm (3 inches) square openings and not more than
15 mass percent will pass the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, as determined
by AASHTO T 11. The material shall have a plasticity index of not more
than 6 as determined by ASSHTO T 90 and a liquid limit of not more than
30 as determined by AASHTO T 89.
2. Unsuitable Material – Material other than suitable materials such as:
(a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic

materials, such as grass, roots and sewerage.
(b) Organic soils such as peat andmuck.
(c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index

exceeding55.
(d) Soils with natural water content exceeding100%.
(e) Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 orlower.
(f) Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined by the

Engineer.
A. General
Prior to construction of embankment, all necessary clearing and grubbing

in that area shall have been performed in conformity with Item 100, Clearing
and Grubbing.
Embankment construction shall consist of constructing roadway

embankments, including preparation of the areas upon which they are to be
placed; the construction of dikes within or adjacent to the roadway; the
placing and compacting of approved material within roadway areas where
unsuitable material has been removed; and the placing and compacting of
embankment material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the
roadway area.
Embankments and backfills shall contain no muck, peat, sod, roots or other
deleterious matter. Rocks, broken concrete or other solid, bulky materials
shall not be placed in embankment areas where piling is to be placed or
driven.
Page 17
Where shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the surface of the
existing ground shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) and to
the specified requirements of this Item.
Where provided on the Plans and Bill of Quantities the top portions of the
roadbed in both cuts and embankments, as indicated, shall consist of
selected borrow for topping fromexcavations.
B. Methods of Construction
Where there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and that

shown on the Plans, a preconstruction survey referred to the datum plane
used in the approved Plan shall be undertaken by the Contractor under the
control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the computation of the actual
volume of the embankment materials.
When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when

new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or
when embankment is built one-half width at a time, the existing slopes that
are steeper than 3:1 when measured at right angles to the roadway shall
be continuously benched over those areas as the work is brought up in
layers. Benching will be subject to the Engineer’s approval and shall be of
sufficient width to permit operation of placement and compaction equipment.
Each horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the original ground and
the vertical sides of the previous cuts. Material thus excavated shall be
placed and compacted along with the embankment material in accordance
with the procedure described in this Section.
Page 18
Unless shown otherwise on the Plans or special Provisions, where an
embankment of less than 1.2 m (4 feet) below subgrade is to be made,
all sod and vegetable matter shall be removed from the surface upon
which the embankment is to be placed, and the cleared surfaced shall
be completely broken up by plowing, scarifying, or steeping to a
minimum depth of 150 mm except as provided in Subsection 102.2.2.
This area shall then be compacted as provided in Subsection 104.3.3.
Sod not required to be removed shall be thoroughly disc harrowed or
scarified before construction of embankment. Wherever a compacted
road surface containing granular materials lies within 900 mm (36
inches) of the subgrade, such old road surface shall be scarified to a
depth of at least 150 mm (6 inches) whenever directed by the
Engineer. This scarified material shall then be compacted as provided
in Subsection 104.3.3.
When shoulder excavation is specified, the roadway shoulders shall be

excavated to the depth and width shown on the Plans. The shoulder
material shall be removed without disturbing the adjacent existing
base course material, and all excess excavated materials shall be
disposed off as provided in Subsection 102.2.3. If necessary, the areas
shall be compacted before being backfilled.
Roadway embankment of earth material shall be placed in horizontal

layers not exceeding 200 mm (8 inches), loose measurement, and shall
be compacted as specified before the next layer is placed. However,
thicker layer maybe placed if vibratory roller with high compactive
effort is used provided that density requirement is attained and as
approved by the Engineer. Trial section to this effect must be conducted
and approved by the Engineer. Effective spreading equipment shall be
used on each lift to obtain uniform thickness as determined in the trial
section prior to compaction. As the compaction of each layer
progresses, continuous leveling and manipulating will be required to
assure uniform density. Water shall be added or removed, if
necessary, in order to obtain the required density. Removal of water
shall be accomplished through aeration by plowing, blading, discing, or
other methods satisfactory to the Engineer.
Where embankment is to be constructed across low swampy ground

that will not support the mass of trucks or other hauling equipment, the
lower part of the fill may be constructed by dumping successive loads
in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater than
necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing subsequent
layers.
When excavated material contains more than 25 mass percent of rock

larger than 150 mm in greatest diameter and cannot be placed in
layers of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing or
further breaking down the pieces resulting from excavation methods,
such materials may be placed on the embankment in layers not
Page 19
exceeding in thickness theapproximate average size of the larger
rocks, but not greater than 600 mm (24 inches).
Even though the thickness of layers is limited as provided above, the

placing of individual rocks and boulders greater than 600 mm in
diameter will be permitted provided that when placed, they do not
exceed 1200 mm (48 inches) in height and provided they are carefully
distributed, with the interstices filled with finer material to form a dense
and compact mass.
Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with suitable leveling

equipment and by distribution of spalls and finer fragments of earth.
Lifts of material containing more than 25 mass percent of rock larger
than 150 mm in greatest dimensions shall not be constructed above
an elevation 300 mm (12 inches) below the finished subgrade. The
balance of the embankment shall be composed of suitable material
smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 200 mm (8 inches) in
loose thickness and compacted as specified for embankments.
Dumping and rolling areas shall be kept separate, and no lift shall be
covered by another until compaction complies with the requirements
of Subsection 104.3.3.
Hauling and leveling equipment shall be so routed and distributed over

each layer of the fill in such a manner as to make use of compaction
effort afforded thereby and to minimize rutting and uneven
compaction.
C. Compaction
a. Compaction Trials
Before commencing the formation of embankments, the

Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer for approval
his proposals for the compaction of each type of fill material to
be used in the works. The proposals shall include the
relationship between the types of compaction equipment, and
the number of passes required and the method of adjusting
moisture content. The Contractor shall carry out full scale
compaction trials on areas not less than 10m wide and 50m
long as required by the Engineer and using his proposed
procedures or such amendments thereto as may be found
necessary to satisfy the Engineer that all the specified
requirements regarding compaction can be consistently
achieved. Compactiontrials with the main types of fill material
to be used in the works shall be completed before work with
the corresponding materials will be allowed tocommence.
Page 20
Throughout the periods when compaction of earthwork is in
progress, the Contractorshall adhere to the compaction
procedures found from compaction trials for each type of
material being compacted, each type of compaction equipment
employed and each degree of compaction specified.
b. Earth
The Contractor shall compact the material placed in all

embankment layers and thematerial scarified to the designated
depth below subgrade in cut sections, until a uniform density of
not less than 95 mass percent of the maximum dry density
determined by AASHTOT 99 Method C ,is attained at a
moisture content determined by Engineer to be suitable for
such density. Acceptance of compaction may be based on
adherence to an approved roller pattern developed as set forth
in Item106, Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips.
The Engineer shall during progress of the Work, make density

tests of compacted material in accordance with AASHTO T
191, T 205, or other approved field density tests, including the
use of properly calibrated nuclear testing devices. A correction
for coarse particles may be made in accordance with AASHTO
T 224. If, by such tests, the Engineer determines that the
specified density and moisture conditions have not been
attained, the Contractor shall perform additional work as may be
necessary to attain the specified conditions.
At least one group of three in-situ density tests shall be carried

out for each 500 m ofeach layer of compacted fill.
c. Rock
Density requirements will not apply to portions of embankments

constructed of materials which cannot be tested in accordance
with approved methods.
Embankment materials classified as rock shall be deposited,

spread and leveled the full width of the fill with sufficient earth
or other fine material so deposited to fill the interstices to
produce a dense compact embankment. In addition, one of the
rollers, vibrators, or compactors meeting the requirements set
forth in Subsection 106.2.1, Compaction Equipment, shall
compact the embankment full width with a minimum of three
complete passes for each layer of embankment.
D. Protection of Roadbed during Construction
Page 21
During the construction of the roadway, the roadbed shall be
maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all times.
Side ditches or gutters emptying from cuts to embankments or
otherwise shall be so constructed as to avoid damage to
embankments by erosion.
E. Protection of Structure
If embankment can be deposited on one side only of abutments, wing

walls, piers or culvert headwalls, care shall be taken that the area
immediately adjacent to the structure is not compacted to the extent
that it will cause overturning of, or excessive pressure against the
structure. When noted on the Plans, the fill adjacent to the end bent of
a bridge shall not be placed higher than the bottom of the backfill of
the bent until the superstructure is in place. When embankment is to
be placed on both sides of a concrete wall or box type structure,
operations shall be so conducted that the embankment is always at
approximately the same elevation on both sides of the structure.
F. Rounding and Warping Slopes
Rounding-Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes,

including the slopes of drainage ditches, shall be rounded as indicated
on the Plans. A layer of earth overlaying rock shall be rounded above
the rock as done in earth slopes.
Warping-adjustments in slopes shall be made to avoid injury in

standing trees or marring of weathered rock, or to harmonize with
existing landscape features, and the transition to such adjusted slopes
shall be gradual. At intersections of cuts and fills, slopes shall be
adjusted and warped to flow into each other or into the natural ground
surfaces without noticeable break.
G. finishing Roadbed and Slopes
After the roadbed has been substantially completed, the full width
shall be conditioned by removing any soft or other unstable
material that will not compact properly or serve the intended
purpose. The resulting areas and all other low sections, holes of
depressions shall be brought to grade with suitable selected
material. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other methods
of work shall be performed or used as necessary to provide a
thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the grades and cross-
sections shown on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer.
All earth slopes shall be left with roughened surfaces but shall be
reasonably uniform, without any noticeable break, and in reasonably
close conformity with the Plans or other surfaces indicated on the
Page 22
Plans or as staked by the Engineer, with no variations therefromreadily
discernible as viewed from the road.
H. Serrated Slopes
Cut slopes in rippable material (soft rock) having slope ratios between
0.75:1 and 2:1 shall be constructed so that the final slope line shall
consist of a series of small horizontal steps. The step rise and tread
dimensions shall be shown on the Plans. No scaling shall be
performed on the stepped slopes except for removal of large rocks
which will obviously be a safety hazard if they fall into the ditchline or
roadway.
I. Earth Berms
When called for in the Contract, permanent earth berms shall be

constructed of well graded materials with no rocks having a diameter
greater than 0.25 the height of the berm. When local material is not
acceptable, acceptable material shall be imported, as directed by the
Engineer.
a. Compacted Berm
Compactedbermconstructionshallconsistofmoisteningordrying
andplacingmaterial as necessary in locations shown on the
drawings or as established by the Engineer. Material shall
contain no frozen material, roots, sod, or other deleterious
materials. Contractor shall take precaution to prevent material
from escaping over the embankment slope. Shoulder surface
beneath berm will be roughened to provide a bond between the
berm and shoulderwhen completed. The Contractor shall
compact the material placed until at least 90 masspercent of
the maximum density is obtained as determined by AASHTO T
99, Method C. The cross-section of the finished compacted
berm shall reasonably conform to the typical cross- section as
shown on the Plans.
b. Uncompacted Berm
Uncompacted berm construction shall consist of drying, if

necessary and placing material in locations shown on the Plans
or as established by the Engineer. Material shall contain no
frozen material, roots, sod or other deleterious materials.
Contractor shall take precautions to prevent material from
escaping over the embankment slope.
J. Method of Measurement
Page 23
The quantity of embankment to be paid for shall be the volume of
material compacted in place, accepted by the Engineer and formed
with material obtained from any source.
Material from excavation per Item 102 which is used in embankment

and accepted by the Engineer will be paid under Embankment and
such payment will be deemed to include the cost of excavating,
hauling, stockpiling and all other costs incidental to the work.
Material for Selected Borrow topping will be measured and paid for
under the same conditions specified in the preceding paragraph.
ITEM 105 SUBGRADE
105(1)a Subgrade Preparation (Common Material)
1. Description
This work item shall consist of the preparation of the subgrade for the support
of overlying structural layers. It shall extend to full width of the roadway. The
road subgrade shall be brought to the elevation shown on the drawings. It
shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Modified Proctor Density.
2. Materials Requirements
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, all materials below subgrade level in
earth cuts to a depth of 150mm or to such greater depth as shown on the
plans or directed by the Engineer shall meet the requirements of Item 2.0,
Earthworks.
Prior to finishing of the subgrade, all culverts, cross drains, ducts and the like
(including their fully compacted backfill), drains and drainage outlets shall be
completed. Any work on the preparation of the subgrade shall not be started
unless prior work herein described shall have been approved by the
Engineer.
The finished compacted surface of the subgrade shall conform to the

allowable tolerances as specified hereunder:
Permitted variation from design +20mm
Level of Surface -30mm
Permitted Surface Irregularity 30mm
Permitted Variation from Design Crossfall or Camber ±0.5%
Permitted Variation from Design Longitudinal Grade over 25m length ±0.1%
Page 24
Where material has been removed from below subgrade level, the resulting
surface shall be compacted to a depth of 150mm. The surface shall then be
replaced with approved suitable materials immediately below subgrade level
in earth cuts to a depth of 150mm, or to such greater depth as may be
specified and shall be compacted in accordance with the requirements of the
specifications.
On embankments, the full width shall be conditioned by removing any soft or

other unstable material that will not compact properly. The resulting areas
and all other low sections, holes, or depressions shall be brought to grade
with suitable material. The entire roadbed shall then be shaped and
compacted. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other methods of work
shall be performed or used as necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted
roadbed shaped to the cross-section shown on the plans.
A. Protection of Completed Works
The Contractor is required to protect and maintain at his own

expense the entire work within the limits of his Contract in
good condition satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he
first started work until all works shall have been completed.
Maintenance shall include repairing and re-compacting ruts,
ridges, soft spots and deteriorated sections of the subgrade
caused by the traffic of the Contractor's vehicle/equipment or
that of the public.
B. Templates and Straight Edges
The Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineer,

approved templates and straight-edges of sufficient number
to check the accuracy of the work, as provided in this
specification.
PART D. SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE
ITEM 201 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
201(1) Aggregate Base Course
1. Description
This item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an

aggregate base course on a prepared subbase in accordance with
this specification and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-
sections shown on the plans, or as established by the Engineer.
2. Materials Requirements
Aggregate for base course shall consist of hard, durable particles or

fragments of crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel and filler of
Page 25
natural or crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter. The
composite material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or
balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted
readily to form a firm, stable base.
The base course material shall conform to the Grading Requirements

shown whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities.
Grading Requirements
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
Standard Alternate US Grading A Grading B

mm Standard
50 2" 100 -
37.5 1-1/2" - 100
25.0 1" 60 - 85 -
19.0 3/4" - 60 - 85
12.5 1/2" 35 - 65 -
4.75 No. 4 20 - 50 30 - 55
0.425 No. 40 5 - 20 8 - 25
0.075 No. 200 0 - 12 2 - 14
The fraction passing the 0.075mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater
than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425mm (No. 40)
sieve.
The fraction passing the 0.425mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid
limit not greater than 25 and plasticity index not greater than 6 as
determined by AASHTO T89 and T90, respectively.
The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00mm (No. 10) sieve, shall have
a mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles
Abrasion test determined by AASHTO T96.
The material passing the 19mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a soaked
CBR value of not less than 80% as determined by AASHTO T193.
Page 26
The CBR value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density (MDD)
as determined by AASHTO T180, Method D.
If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for meeting

the grading requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be
uniformly blended with the base course material on the road or in a
pugmill unless otherwise specified or approved. Filler shall be taken
from sources approved by the Engineer, shall be free from hard lumps
and shall not contain more than 15 percent of material retained on the
4.75mm (No. 4) sieve.
A. Preparation for Existing Surface
The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided

under paragraph 2.1, Subgrade Preparation of Section
02500, Roadworks, before placing in the base material.
B. Placing
It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of

Subsection 2.2.3.b, Placing.
C. Spreading and Compacting
It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of

Subsection 2.2.3.c, except that the field density required of
each layer is not less than 100 percent of the maximum dry
density determined using Modified Proctor Test (ASTM
D1557 or AASHTO T180) Method D. The field density is
determined in accordance with ASTM D1556 or AASHTO
T191.
D. Trial Sections
Trial sections shall conform in all respects to the requirements

specified in Subsection 2.2.3.d.
E. Tolerances
The aggregate base course shall be laid to the designed level

and transverse slopes shown on the plans. The allowable
tolerances shall be in accordance with the following:
Permitted variation from design Thickness of Layer ±10mm
Permitted variation from design Level of Surface +5mm
-10mm
Page 27
Permitted Surface Irregularity 5mm
Permitted variation from design Crossfall or Camber ±0.2%
Permitted Variation from Design Longitudinal Grade
over 25m length ±0.1%
PART E. SURFACE COURSE
ITEM 311 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
311(1)b1 - c1 PCC Pavement (Plain) - Conventional Method, 200mm thk
311(1)c1 - c1 PCC Pavement (Plain) - Conventional Method, 230mm thk
1. Description
This Item shall consist of a pavement of Portland Cement Concrete, with or without
reinforcement, constructed on the prepared base in accordance with this specification
and in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections shown
on the plans.
2. Material Requirements
A. Portland Cement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of item 700, Hydraulic Cement. Only
Type I Portland Cement shall be used unless otherwise provided for in the Special
provisions. Different brands or the same brands from different mills shall not be mixed
nor shall they be used alternatively unless the mix is approved by the Engineer.
However, the use of Portland Pozzolan Cement Type IP meeting the requirements
of AASHTO M 240/ASTM C 595, Specifications for Blended Hydraulic Cement shall
be allowed, provided that trial mixes shall be done and that the mixes meet the
concrete strength requirements, the AASHTO/ASTM provisions pertinent to the use
of Portland Pozzolan Cement Type IP shall be adopted.
Cement which for any reason has become partially set or which contains
lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded
or used bags shall not be used.
Samples of Cement shall be obtained in accordance with AASHTO T 127.
B. Fine Aggregate
It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings, or other inert materials with similar
characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong and durable particles.
Fine aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in the
same pile nor used alternately in the same class of concrete without the approval of
the Engineer.
Page 28
It shall not contain more than three (3) mass percent of material passing the 0.075
mm (No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more than one (1) mass percent each of clay
lumps or shale. The use of beach sand will not be allowed without the approval of the
Engineer.
If the fine aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness
test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 10 mass percent.
The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of organic impurities. If
subjected to the colorimatic test for organic impurities and a color darker than the
standard is produced, it shall be rejected. However, when tested for the effect of
organic impurities on strength of mortar by AASHTO T 71, the fine aggregate may be
used if the relative strength at 7 and 28 days is not less than 95 percent.
The fine aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to Table 1
Table 1
9.5 mm (3/8in) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 95 - 100
2.36 mm (No. 8) -
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45 - 80
0.600 mm (No. 30) -
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5 - 30
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0 - 10
C. Coarse Aggregates
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other approved inert
materials (coralline or dolomites) of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof,
having hard, strong, durable pieces and free from any adherent coatings.
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other approved inert
materials of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong,
durable pieces and free from any adherent coatings.
It shall contain no more than one (1) mass percent of material passing the 0.075 mm
(No. 200) sieve, not more than 0.25 mass percent of clay lumps, nor more than 3.5
mass percent of soft fragments.
Page 29
If the coarse aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness
test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 12 mass percent.
It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by AASHTO T
96.
If the slag is used, its density shall not be less than 1120 kg/m3. The gradation of the
coarse aggregate shall conform to Table 2.
Only one grading specification shall be used from any one source.
Table 2
Grading Requirement for Coarse Aggregate
Standard Alternate US Grading A Grading B Grading C

mm Standard
75.00 3" 100 - -
63.00 2-1/2" 90 - 100 100 100
50.00 2" - 90 - 100 95 - 100
37.5 1-1/2" 25 - 60 35 - 70 -
25.0 1" - 0 - 15 35 - 70
19.0 3/4" 0 - 10 - -
12.5 1/2" 0-5 0-5 10 - 30
4.75 No. 4 - - 0-5
D. Water
Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall be reasonably

clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other substances injurious to the
finished product. Water will be tested in accordance with and shall meet the
requirements of Item 714, Water. Water which is drinkable may be used without test.
Where the source of water is shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude
silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.
E. Reinforcing Steel
Page 30
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Dowels and tie
bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M31 or M42, except that rail steel
shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent and restraightened during
construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowels shall be plain round bars.
Before delivery to the site of work, one half of the length of each dowel shall be
painted with one coat of approved lead or tar paint.
The sleeves of dowel bars shall be metal of approved design to cover 50mm (2 in.),
plus or minus 5mm (1/4 in.) of the dowel with closed end, and with a suitable stop to
hold the end of the sleeve at least 25mm (1 in.) from the end of the dowel. Sleeves
shall be of such design that they do not collapse during construction.
F. Wire Mesh
The diameter of wire for lateral and longitudinal directions shall not be less than 6 mm
in diameter. Tie wire shall be No. 16 gauged annealed wire.
a. Fabrication of Wire Mesh
The spacing on the lateral direction is twice wider than that of the
longitudinal direction. The weight of wire mesh shall not be less than
3 kg/m2. It shall be fabricated by welding or binding at each crossing
point and shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 185.
b. Installation of Wire Mesh
After placement of slip bar placed at every 9.0 m maximum interval

for weakened plane joint, wire mesh shall be placed at a depth of 5.0
cm to 7.5 cm below the surface of the slab or at 2/3 of thickness from
the bottom of the pavement. It shall be supported by any approved
support assemblies or spacers against displacement and shall be tied
to it using tie wires. The sheets of the welded wire mesh shall be flat,
and proper care shall be observed in handling and placing it to ensure
its installation in the proper position.
Welded wire mesh has become bent or kinked shall be rejected.
G. Joint Fillers
Poured joint fillers shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber filler
conforming to the applicable requirements of Item 705, Joint Materials.
Preformed joint filler shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 705.
It shall be punched to admit the dowels where called for in the plans. The
filler of each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and
width required for the joint.
H. Admixtures
Page 31
Air-entraining admixture shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
154.
Chemical admixtures, if specified or permitted, shall conform to the

requirements of AASHTO M 194.
Fly Ash, if specified or permitted as a mineral admixture and not exceeding

20% partial replacement of Portland Cement in concrete mix shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM C 618.
Admixtures may be added to the concrete mix to produce some desired

modifications to the properties of concrete if necessary, but not as partial
replacement of cement. If specified, monofilament polypropylene synthetic
fibrin fibers, which are used as admixture to prevent the formation of
temperature/shrinkage cracks and increase impact resistance of concrete
slabs shall be applied in the dosage rate recommended by its manufacturer.
I. Curing Materials
Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements as specified;
a) Burlap cloth - AASHTO M 182
b) Liquid membrane forming compounds - AASHTO M 148
c) Sheeting (film) materials - AASHTO M 171
Cotton mats and water-proof paper can be used.
J. Calcium chloride/Calcium Nitrate
It shall conform to AASHTO M144, if specified or permitted by the Engineer,

as accelerator.
K. Storage of Cement and Aggregate
All cement shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site, in

weatherproof building which will protect the cement from dampness. The floor
shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be placed in locations
approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the
shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such a manner
as to allow the earliest deliveries to be used first and to provide easy access
for identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage buildings shall
have capacity for storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling
at least twelve (12) days before the cement is to be used. Bulk cement, if
used, shall be transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. Stored
cement shall meet the requirements at any time after storage when retest is
ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use, all cement shall be free-flowing
and free of lumps.
Page 32
The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent
segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The engineer may require
that aggregates be stored in separate platforms at satisfactory locations.
In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer may

require that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or more sizes.
Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in separate bins or in separate
stock piles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the material at the
edges of the piles from becoming intermixed.
L. Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete
The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the absolute volume
method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1,
"Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and
Heavyweight Concrete".
It is the intent of this Specification to require at least 364 kg of cement per

cubic meter of concrete to meet the minimum strength requirements. The
Engineer shall determine from laboratory tests of the materials to be used,
the cement content and the proportions of aggregate and water that will
produce workable concrete having a slump of between 40 and 75 mm if not
vibrated or between 10 and 40 mm if vibrated, and a flexural strength of not
less than 3.8 MPa when tested by the third-point method or 4.5 MPa when
tested by the mid-point method at fourteen (14) days in accordance with
AASHTO T97 and T177, respectively; or a compressive strength of 24.1 MPa
for cores taken at fourteen (14) days in accordance with AASHTO T24.
Slump shall be determined using AASHTO 119.
The designer shall consider the use of lean concrete (econocrete) mixtures
using local materials or specifically modified conventional concrete mixes in
base course and in the lower course of composite, monolithic concrete
pavements using a minimum of 75mm (3 inches) of conventional concrete as
the surface course.
The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be
accompanied with certified test data from an approved laboratory
demonstrating the adequacy of the mix design. A change in the source of
materials during the progress of work may necessitate a new design mix.
A. Quality Control of Concrete
a. General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control of all materials
during the handling, blending, mixing and placement operations.
Page 33
b. Quality Control Plan
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a Quality Control Plan detailing his
production control procedures and the type and frequency of sampling and
testing to ensure that the concrete he produces complies with the
specifications. The Engineer shall be provided free access to recent plant
production records, and if requested, informational copies of mix design,
material certifications and sampling and testing reports.
c. Qualification of Workmen
Experienced and qualified personnel shall perform all batching or mixing

operations for the concrete mix, and shall be present at the plant and jobsite
to control the concrete productions whenever the plant is in operation.
d. Quality Control Testing
The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and inspection necessary
to assure quality control of the component materials and the concrete.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the gradation of fine and
coarse aggregates and for testing the concrete mixture for slump, air content,
water-cement ratio and temperature. He shall conduct his operations so as
to produce a mix conforming to the approved mix design.
e. Documentation
The Contractor shall maintain adequate records of all inspections and tests.
The records shall indicate the nature and number of observations made the
number and type of deficiencies found, the quantities approved and rejected,
and nature of any corrective action taken.
The Engineer may take independent quality assurance samples at random

location for acceptance purposes as he deems necessary.
B. Equipment
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of the
work shall be approved by the Engineer as to design, capacity and mechanical
condition. The equipment shall be at the jobsite sufficiently ahead of construction
operations to be examined thoroughly and approved.
a. Batching Plant and Equipment (N.A.)
a.1General. The batching shall include bins, weighing hoppers, and

scales for the fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate.
If cement is used in bulk, a bin, a hopper, and separate scale for
cement shall be included. The weighing hopper shall be properly
sealed and vented to preclude dusting operation. The batch plant
Page 34
shall be equipped with a suitable non-resettable batch counter which
will correctly indicate the number of batches proportioned.
a.2Bins and Hoppers. Bins with adequate separate compartments for

fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate shall be
provided in the batching plant.
a.3Scales. Scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of

either the beam type or the springless-dial type. They shall be
accurate within one-half percent (0.5%) throughout the range of use.
Poises shall be designed to be locked in any position and to prevent
unauthorized change. Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often
as the Engineer may deem necessary to assure their continued
accuracy.
a.4Automatic Weighing Devices. Unless otherwise allowed on the

Contract, batching plants shall be equipped with automatic weighing
devices of an approved type to proportion aggregates and bulk
cement.
b. Mixers
b.1General. Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction or at a

central plant or wholly or in part in truck mixers. Each mixer shall have
a manufacturer's plate attached in a prominent place showing the
capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and the
speed of rotation of the mixing drum or blades.
b.2Mixers at the Site of Construction. Mixing shall be done in an

approved mixer capable of combining the aggregates, cement and
water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified
mixing and discharging and distributing of the mixture without
segregation on the prepared grade. The mixer shall be equipped with
an approved timing device which will automatically lock the discharge
lever when the drum has been charged and release it at the end of
the mixing period. In case of failure of the timing device, the mixer
may be used for the balance of the day while it is being repaired,
provided that each batch is mixed 90 seconds. The mixer shall be
equipped with a suitable non-resettable batch counter which shall
correctly indicate the number of batches mixed.
b.3Truck Mixer and Truck Agitators. Truck mixers used for mixing and
hauling concrete, and truck agitators used for hauling central-mixed
concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M157.
b.4Non-Agitator Trucks. Bodies of non-agitating hauling equipment

for concrete shall be smooth, mortar-tight metal containers and shall
b e capable of discharging the concrete at a satisfactory controlled
rate without segregation.
Page 35
c. Paving and Finishing Equipment
The concrete shall be placed with an approved paver designed to spread,

consolidate, screed and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one
complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand
finishing will be necessary to provide a dense and homogenous pavement in
conformance with the Plans and Specifications.
The finishing machine shall be equipped with at least two (2) oscillating type
transverse screed.
Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8,300 to 9,600 impulses per minute

under load at a maximum spacing of 60 cm.
d. Concrete Saw
The Contractor shall provide sawing equipment in adequate number of units

and power to complete the sawing with a water-cooled diamond edge saw
blade or an abrasive wheel to the required dimensions and at the required
rate. He shall provide at least one (1) stand-by saw in good working condition
and with an ample supply of saw blades.
e. Forms
Forms shall be of steel, of an approved section, and of depth equal to the

thickness of the pavement at the edge. The base of the forms shall be of
sufficient width to provide necessary stability in all directions. The flange
braces must extend outward on the base to not less than 2/3 the height of the
form.
All forms shall be rigidly supported on bed of thoroughly compacted material

during the entire operation of placing and finishing the concrete. Forms shall
be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in place,
they will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact and
vibration of the consolidation and finishing or paving equipment.
C. Preparation of Grade
After the subgrade or base has been placed and compacted to the required density,
the areas which will support the paving machine and the grade on which the
pavement is to be constructed shall be trimmed to the proper elevation by means of
a properly designed machine extending the prepared work areas compacted at least
60 cm beyond each edge of the proposed concrete pavement. If loss of density
results from the trimming operations, it shall be restored by additional compaction
before concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared subgrade or
base, the surface shall be checked and corrected immediately ahead of the placing
concrete.
The subgrade or base shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed.
Page 36
D. Setting Forms
a. Base Support.
The foundation under the forms shall be hard and true to grade so that the
form when set will be firmly in contact for its whole length and at the specified
grade. Any roadbed, which at the form line is found below established grade,
shall be filled with approved granular materials to grade in lifts of three (3) cm
or less, and thoroughly rerolled or tamped. Imperfections or variations above
grade shall be corrected by tamping or by cutting as necessary.
b. Form Setting.
Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance of the point where concrete is being
placed. After the forms have been set to correct grade, the grade shall be
thoroughly tamped, mechanically or by hand, at both the inside and outside
edges of the base of the forms. The forms shall not deviate from true line by
more than one (1) cm at any point.
c. Grade and Alignment.
The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be checked and
corrections made by the Contractor immediately before placing the concrete.
Testing as to crown and elevation, prior to placing of concrete can be made
by means of holding an approved template in a vertical position and moved
backward and forward on the forms.
When any form has been disturbed or any grade has become unstable, the
form shall be reset and rechecked.
E. Conditioning of Subgrade or Base Course
When side forms have been securely set to grade, the subgrade or base coarse shall
be brought to proper cross-section. High areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation.
Low areas shall be filled and compacted to a condition similar to that of surrounding
grade. The finished grade shall be maintained in a smooth and compacted condition
until the pavement is placed.
Unless waterproof subgrade or base course cover material is specified, the subgrade
or base course shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed. If it subsequently
becomes too dry, the subgrade or base course shall be sprinkled, but the method of
sprinkling shall not be such as to form mud or pools of water.
F. Handling, Measuring and Batching Materials
The batch plant site, layout, equipment and provisions for transporting material shall
be such as to assure continuous supply of material to the work.
Stockpiles shall be built up in layers of not more than one (1) meter in thickness. Each
layer shall be completely in place before beginning the next which shall not be
Page 37
allowed to "cone" down over the next lower layer. Aggregates from different sources
and of different grading shall not be stockpiled together.
All washed aggregates and aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods,

shall be stockpiled or binned for draining at least twelve (12) hours before being
batched.
When mixing is done at the side of the work, aggregates shall be transported from
the batching plant to the mixer in batch boxes, vehicle bodies, or other containers of
adequate capacity and construction to properly carry the volume required. Partitions
separating batches shall be adequate and effective to prevent spilling from one
compartment to another while in transit or being dumped. When bulk cement is used,
the Contractor shall use a suitable method of handling the cement from weighing
hopper to transporting container or into the batch itself for transportation to the mixer,
with chute, boot or other approved device, to prevent loss of cement, and to provide
positive assurance of the actual presence in each batch of the entire cement content
specified.
Bulk cement shall be transported to the mixer in tight compartments carrying the full
amount of cement required for the batch. However, if allowed in the Special
Provisions, it may be transported between the fine and coarse aggregate. When
cement is placed in contact with aggregates, batches may be rejected unless mixed
within 1-1/2 hours of such contact. Cement in original shipping packages may be
transported on top of the aggregates, each batch containing the number of sacks
required by the job mix.
The mixer shall be charged without loss of cement. Batching shall be so conducted
as to result in the weight to each material required within a tolerance of one (1)
percent for the cement and two (2) percent for aggregates.
Water may be measured either by volume or weight. The accuracy of measuring the
water shall be within a range of error of not more than one (1) percent. Unless the
water is to be weighed, the water-measuring equipment shall include an auxiliary tank
from which the measuring tank shall be equipped with an outside tap and valve to
provide checking the setting, unless other means are provided for readily and
accurately determining the amount of water in the tank. The volume of the auxiliary
tank shall be at least equal to that of the measuring tank.
G. Mixing Concrete
The concrete may be mixed at the site of the work in a central-mix plant, or in truck
mixers. The mixer shall be of an approved type and capacity. Mixing time will be
measured from the time all materials, except water, are in the drum. Ready-mixed
concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with requirements of AASHTO
M 157, except that the minimum required revolutions at the mixing speed for transmit-
mixed concrete may be reduced to not less than that recommended by the mixer
manufacturer. The number of revolutions recommended by the mixer manufacturer
shall be indicated on the manufacturer’s serial plate attached to the mixer. The
contractor shall furnish test data acceptable to the Engineer verifying that the make
Page 38
and model of the mixer will produce uniform concrete conforming to the provisions of
AASHTO M 157 at the reduced number of revolutions shown on the serial plate.
When mixed at the site or in a central mixing plant, the mixing time shall not be less
than fifty (50) seconds nor more than ninety (90) seconds for drum type of central
mixers, unless mixer performance tests prove adequate mixing of the concrete in
shorter time period.
The operation and mixing time for pan, twin shaft and other type of central mixers
shall be based on the mixer manufacturer’s instructions.
Four (4) seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time if timing starts at the
instant the skip reaches its minimum raised positions. Mixing time ends when the
discharge chute opens. Transfer time in multiply drum mixers is included in mixing
time. The contents of an individual mixer drum shall be removed before a succeeding
batch is emptied therein.
The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the manufacturer’s name
plate attached on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the specified time shall be
discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his expense. The volume of concrete
mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity may be permitted
provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are
satisfactory, and provided no spillage of concrete takes place.
The batches shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing water shall
be entered in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be
uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first fifteen (15) seconds
of the mixing period. The throat of the drum shall be kept free of such accumulations
as may restrict the free flow of materials into the drum.
Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck mixers,
truck agitators or non-agitating truck specified in Subsection 311.3.2, Equipment. The
time elapsed from the time water is added to the mix until the concrete is deposited
in place at the Site shall not mix until the concrete is deposited in place at the Site
shall not exceed forty five (45) minutes when the concrete is hauled on non-agitating
trucks, nor ninety (90) minutes when hauled in truck mixers or truck agitators, except
that in hot weather or under other conditions contributing to quick hardening of the
concrete, the maximum allowable time may be reduced by the Engineer.
In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are authorized for small
project requiring less than 75 cu.m. of concrete per day of pouring, the weight
proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In such cases,
suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture of the aggregates,
including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in
accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9.
Concrete mixing by chute is allowed provided that a weighing scale for determining
the batch weight will be used.
Page 39
Re-tempering concrete by adding water or by other means shall not be permitted,
except that the concrete is delivered in truck mixers, additional water may be added
to the batch materials and additional mixing performed to increase the slump to meet
the specified requirements, if permitted by the Engineer, provided all these operations
are performed within forty-five (45) minutes after the initial mixing operation and the
water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Concrete that is not within the specified slump
limits at the time of placement shall not be used. Admixtures for increasing the
workability or got accelerating the setting of the concrete will be permitted only when
specifically approved by the Engineer.
H. Limitation of Mixing
No concrete shall be mixed, placed or finished when natural light is insufficient, unless
an adequate and approved artificial lighting system is operated.
During hot weather, the Engineer shall require that steps be taken to prevent the
temperature of mixed concrete from exceeding a maximum temperature of 32°C.
Concrete not in place within ninety (90) minutes from the time the ingredients were
charged into the mixing drum or that has developed initial set shall not be used.
Retempering of concrete or mortar which has partially hardened, that is remixing with
or without additional cement, aggregate, or water, shall not be permitted.
In order that the concrete may be properly protected against the effects of rain before
the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be required to have available
at all times materials for the protection of the edges and surface of the unhardened
concrete.
I. Placing Concrete
Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner to require minimal re=handling. Unless

truck mixers or non-agitating hauling equipment are equipped with means to
discharge concrete without segregation of the materials, the concrete shall be
unloaded into an approved spreading device and mechanically spread on the grade
in such a manner as to prevent segregation. Placing shall continuous between
transverse joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand
spreading shall be done with shovels, not rakes. Workmen shall not be allowed to
walk in the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated with earth or foreign
substances.
When concrete is to be placed adjoining a previously constructed lane and

mechanical equipment will be operated upon the existing lane, that previously
constructed lane shall have attained the strength for fourteen (14) day concrete. If
only finishing equipment is carried on the existing lane, paving in adjoining lanes may
be permitted after three (3) days.
Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all forms
and along the full length and on both sides of all joint assemblies by means of
vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be permitted to come in contact
Page 40
with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case shall the vibrator be
operated longer than fifteen (15) seconds in any location. Concrete shall be deposited
as near as possible to the expansion and contraction joints without disturbing them,
but shall not be dumped from the discharge bucket or hopper into a joint assembly
unless the hopper is well centered on the joint assembly. Should any concrete
material fall on or be worked into the surface of a complete slab, it shall be removed
completely.
J. Test Specimens
As work progresses, at least one (1) set consisting of three (3) concrete beam test
specimens, 150 mm x 150 mm x 525 mm shall be taken from each 330 m² of
pavement, 230 mm depth, or fraction thereof placed each day. Test specimens shall
be made under the supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide all
concrete and other facilities necessary in making the test specimens and shall protect
them from damage by construction operations. Cylinder samples shall not be used
as substitute for determining the adequacy of the strength of concrete.
The beams shall me made, cured, and tested in accordance with AASHTO T. 23 and
T 97.
K. Strike-off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement
Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be struck off to conform to the cross-
section shown on the Plans and to an elevation such that when concrete is properly
consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement will be at the elevation shown
on the Plans. When reinforced concrete pavement is placed in two (2) layers, the
bottom layer shall be struck off and consolidated to such length and depth that the
sheet of fabric or bar mat may be laid full length on the concrete in its final position
without further manipulation. The reinforcement shall then be placed directly upon the
concrete, after which the top layer of the concrete shall be placed, struck off and
screeded. Any portion of the bottom layer of concrete which has been placed more
than 30 minutes without being covered with the top layer shall be removed and
replaced with freshly mixed concrete at the Contractor’s expense. When reinforced
concrete is placed in one layer, the reinforcement may be firmly positioned in advance
of concrete placement or it may be placed at the depth shown on the Plans in plastic
concrete, after spreading by mechanical or vibratory means.
Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, mill scale and loose or thick
rust which could impair bond of the steel with the concrete.
L. Joints
Joints shall be constructed of the type and dimensions, and at the location required
by the plans or special provisions. All joints shall be protected from the intrusion of
injurious foreign material until sealed.
a. Longitudinal Joint
Page 41
Deformed steel tie bars of specified length, size, spacing and materials shall
be placed perpendicular to the longitudinal joints; they shall be placed by
approved mechanical equipment rigidly secured by chair or other approved
supports to prevent displacement. Tie bars shall not be painted or coated
with asphalt or other material, or enclosed in tubes or sleeves. When shown
on the plans and when adjacent lanes of pavement are constructed
separately, steel side forms shall be used which will form a keyway along the
construction joint. Tie bars, except those made of rail steel, may be bent at
right angles against the form of the first lane constructed and straightened
into final position before the concrete of the adjacent lane is placed, or in lieu
of bent tie bars, approved two-piece connectors may be used.
Longitudinal formed joints shall consist of a groove or cleft, extending

downward from and normal to, the surface of the pavement. These joints
shall be affected or formed by an approved mechanically or manually
operated device to the dimensions and line indicated on the plans and while
the concrete is in a plastic state. The groove or cleft shall be filled with either
a pre-molded strip or poured material is required.
The longitudinal joints shall be continuous. There shall be no gaps in either

transverse or longitudinal joints at the intersection of the joints.
Longitudinal sawed joints shall be cut by means of approved concrete saws

to the depth, width and line shown on the plans. Suitable guidelines or
devices shall be used to assure cutting the longitudinal joints on the true line.
The longitudinal joints shall be sawed before the end of the curing period or
shortly thereafter and before any equipment or vehicles are allowed on the
pavement. The sawed area shall be thoroughly cleaned and, if required, the
joints shall immediately be filled with sealer.
Longitudinal pavement insert type shall be formed by placing a continuous

strip of plastic material. The plastic material shall not react adversely with
chemical constituents of the concrete.
b. Transverse Expansion Joint
The expansion joint filler shall be continuous from form to form shaped to the
subgrade and to the keyway along the form. Preformed joint filler shall be
furnished in lengths equal to the pavement width or equal to the width of one
lane. Damaged or repaired joint filler shall not be used.
The expansion joint filler shall be held in a vertical position. An approved

installing bar, or other device, shall be used if required to secure preformed
joint expansion filler at the proper grade and alignment during placing and
finishing of the concrete. Finished joint shall not deviate more than 6mm from
a straight line. If joint fillers are assembled sections, there shall be no offsets
between adjacent units. No plugs of concrete shall be permitted anywhere
within the expansion space.
Page 42
c. Transverse Contraction Joint
When shown on the plans, it shall consist of planes of weakness created by

forming or cutting grooves in the surface of the pavement and shall include
load transfer assemblies.
c.1 Transverse Strip Contraction Joint - It shall be formed by installing

a parting strip to be left in place as shown on the plans.
c.2 Formed Groove - It shall be made by depressing an approved tool

or divide into the plastic concrete. The tool or device shall remain in
place at least until the concrete has attained its initial set and shall
then be removed without disturbing the adjacent concrete, unless the
device is designed to remain in the joint.
c.3 Sawed Construction Joint - It shall be created by sawing

grooves in the surface of the pavement of the width, depth, and at
the spacing and lines shown on the plans, with an approved
concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, it shall be thoroughly
cleaned including the adjacent concrete surface.
Sawing of joints shall commence as soon as the concrete has

hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without excessive raveling,
usually within 4 to 24 hours. All joints shall be sawed before
uncontrolled shrinkage cracking takes place. If necessary, the sawing
operations shall be carried on during the day or night, regardless of
weather conditions. The sawing of any joints shall be omitted if crack
occurs at or near the joint locations prior to the time of sawing. Sawing
shall be discounted when a crack develops ahead of the saw. In
general, all joints shall be sawed in sequence. If extreme conditions
exist which make it impractical to prevent erratic cracking by early
sawing, the contraction joint groove shall be formed prior to initial set
of concrete as provided above.
d. Transverse Construction Joint
It shall be constructed when there is an interruption of more than 30 minutes

in the concreting operations. No transverse joint shall be constructed within
1.50m of an expansion joint, contraction joint, or plane of weakness. If
sufficient concrete has been mixed at the time of interruption to form a slab of
at least 1.50m long, the excess concrete from the last preceding joints shall
be removed and disposed of as directed.
e. Load Transfer Device
Dowels, when used, shall be held in position parallel to the surface and center
line of the slab by a metal device that is left in the pavement.
The portion of each dowel painted with one coat of lead or tar, in conformance
with the requirements of Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement, shall be
Page 43
thoroughly coated with approved bituminous material e.g., MC-70, or an
approved lubricant, to prevent the concrete from binding to that portion of the
dowel. The sleeves of dowels shall be metal designed to cover 50mm plus
or minus 5mm (1/4 inch), of the dowel, with a watertight closed end and with
a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeves at least 25mm (1 inch) from the
end of the dowel. In lieu of using dowel assemblies at contraction joints, dowel
may be placed in the full thickness of pavement by a mechanical device
approved by the Engineer.
f. Final Strike-Off (Consolidation and Finishing)
f.1 General Requirements
Start finishing operations immediately after placement of concrete.

The surface of the pavement on both sides of a joint shall be finished
to the same grade. Provide hand finishing equipment and tools in a
clean condition and free from hardened concrete or grout. When
ambient conditions are such as to cause rapid loss of moisture from
pavement surface, a uniform fog spray of water to restore the surface
sheen may be applied during finishing operations. Avoid application
of excessive amount of water to the surface.
f.2 Side Form Finishing
Strike off and screed the concrete to the required crown and cross-
section by the use of wood or metal screed. Transverse rotating tube
or pipe shall not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. The
elevation of the concrete shall be such that, when consolidated and
finished, the surface of the pavement will be adequately consolidated
and at the required grade. Equip the finishing tools with two screeds
readily and accurately adjustable for changes in pavement crown and
compensation for wear and other causes. It shall make as many trips
over each area of pavement and as such intervals as necessary to
give the proper compaction, retain the coarse aggregate near the
finished surface, and produce a surface of uniform texture, true to
grade and crown. Excessive operation over an area, which results in
an excess of mortar and water being brought to the surface, will not
be permitted.
f.3 Joint Finish
Before the concrete is hardened, correct any edge slump of the

pavement, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of 6mm. Finish the
concrete surface on each side of the construction joints to the same
plane; correct all deviations before the newly placed concrete has
hardened. Slip-form finishing is specified below.
f.4 Hand Finishing
Page 44
Strike-off and screed the surface of the concrete to elevations slightly
above finish grade so that when the concrete is consolidated and
finished, the surface of the pavement is at the indicated elevation.
Vibrate the entire surface until the required compaction and reduction
of surface is secured with a strike-off template.
f.5 Longitudinal Floating
After the initial finishing, further smoothen and consolidate the

concrete by means of hand-operated longitudinal floats. Use floats
that are not less than 3.65 meter long and 150mm wide and stiffened
to prevent flexing and warping.
f.6 Straightedge Finishing
After completion of the longitudinal floating, any excess water or

laitance shall be removed from the surface of the pavement
transversely with a 3 meter straightedge or, where the use of a
straightedge is not practicable, with a long-handled wood float having
a blade not less than 1.5 meter in length and 150mm in width. Do not
use a wooden float to float the entire surface of the pavement in lieu
of, or supplementing, the use of the longitudinal float, except as
follows: when strike-off and consolidation is done by hand or if the
crown of the pavement will not permit the use of a longitudinal flat, the
surface shall be floated transversely by means of the wood float.
f.7 Straightedge Testing
After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess
water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, test the slab with
an accurate 3 meter straightedge. Hold the straightedge in
successive positions to centerline of the slab in contact with the
surface of the concrete, and go over the whole slab area from one
side of the slab to the other as necessary. Advance along the
centerline of the slab in successive stages of not more than one-half
the length of the straightedge. Fill all depressions immediately with
freshly mixed concrete, strike-off, consolidate, and refinish.
Straightedge testing and surface correction shall continue until the
entire surface is within the tolerance specified.
f.8 Texturing
Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete
becomes non-plastic, the surface of the pavement shall be given a
texture as specified below, Surface Finish.
f.9 Surface Finish
a. Burlap Drag Finish - Before the concrete becomes non-

plastic, finish the surface of the slab by dragging on the
Page 45
surface a strip of clean, wet burlap measuring from 1.5 to 3
meters long and 0.60 meter wider than the width of the
pavement. Drag the surface so as to produce a finished
surface with a fine granular or sandy texture without leaving
disfiguring marks.
b. Brooming - Apply to concrete pavement a broomed finish.

Before the concrete becomes non-plastic, finish the surface of
the slab by brooming the surface with a new broom at least
450mm wide. Gently pull the broom over the surface of the
pavement from edge to edge just before the concrete
becomes non-plastic. Slightly overlap the adjacent strokes of
the broom. Broom perpendicular to the centerline of the
pavement so that the corrugation produced will be uniform in
character and width, and not more than 1.5mm in depth. The
broomed surface shall be free from porous spots,
irregularities, depressions, and small pockets or rough spots
such as may be caused by accidentally disturbing particles of
coarse aggregate embedded near the surface.
Regardless of the method used for the final finish, the

hardened surface of the pavement shall have a coefficient of
friction of 0.25 or more. Completed pavement that is found to
have a coefficient of friction less than 0.25 shall be ground or
scored by the Contractor at his expense to provide the
required coefficient of friction.
f.10 Edging
At the time the concrete has attained a degree of hardness suitable

for edging, carefully finish all slab edges, including the edges at the
formed joints, with an edge having a maximum radius of 4mm. If
brooming is specified for the final surface finish, edge all transverse
joints before starting the brooming, then operate the broom to
obliterate as much as possible the mark left by the edging tool without
disturbing the rounded corner left by the edger. Clean by removing
all loose fragments and soupy mortar from corners or edges of slabs
which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper
finishing. Refill the voids solidly with a mixture of suitable proportions
and consistency and refinish. Remove all unnecessary tool marks
and edges. All remaining edges shall be smooth and true to line.
Select tools, method, and workmanship to produce joints having
edges of the same quality as other parts of the pavement as approved
by the Engineer. After removal of forms, repair all damaged and
honeycombed areas with mortar composed of one part portland
cement to two parts sand.
g. Surface Test
Page 46
As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement surface
shall be tested with a 3-m straight-edge or other specified device. Areas
showing high spots of more than 3 mm but not exceeding 12 mm in 3 m shall
be marked and immediately ground down with an approved grinding toll to an
elevation where the area or spot will not show surface deviations in excess of
3 mm when tested with 3 m straight0edge. Where the departure from correct
cross-section exceeds 12 mm, the pavement shall be removed and replaced
by and at the expense of the Contractor.
Any area or section so removed shall be not less than 1.5 m in length and not
less than the full width of the lane involved. When it is necessary to remove
and replace a section of pavement, any remaining portion of the slab adjacent
to the joints is less than 1.5 m in length, shall also be removed and replaced.
h. Curing
Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed and the
concrete has sufficiently set, the entire surface of the newly placed concrete
shall be cured in accordance with either one of the methods described herein.
Failure to provide sufficient cover material of whatever kind the Contractor
may elect to use, or the lack of water to adequately take care of both curing
and other requirements, shall be a cause for immediate suspension of
concreting operations. The concrete shall not be left exposed for more than
½ hour between stages of curing or during the curing period.
In all congested places, concrete works should be designed so that the

designed strength is attained.
h.1 Cotton of Burlap Mats
The surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered with mats. The
mats used shall be of such length (or width) that as laid they will
extend at least twice the thickness of the pavement beyond the edges
of the slab. The mat shall be placed so that the entire surface and the
edges of the slab are completely sovered. Prior to being placed, the
mats shall be saturated thoroughly with water. The mat shall be so
placed and weighted down so as to cause them to remain in intimate
contact with the covered surface. The mat shall be maintained fully
wetted and in position for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed
unless otherwise specified.
h.2 Waterproof Paper
The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered
with waterproof paper, the units shall be lapped at least 45 cm. The
paper shall be so placed and weighted down so as to cause it to
remain in intimate contact with the surface covered. The paper shall
have such dimension but each unit as laid will extend beyond the
edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the pavement, or at
Page 47
pavement width and 60 cm strips of paper for the edges. If laid
longitudinally, paper not manufactured in sizes which will provide this
width shall be securely sewed or cemented together, the joints being
securely sealed in such manner that they do not open up or separate
during the curing period. Unless otherwise specified, the covering
shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the concrete has been
placed. The surface of the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted prior
to the placing of the paper.
h.3 Straw Curing
When this type of curing is used, the pavement shall be cured initially
with burlap or cotton mats, until after final set of the concrete or, in any
case, for 12 hours after placing the concrete. As soon as the mats are
removed, the surface and sides of the pavement shall be thoroughly
wetted and covered with at least 20 cm of straw or hay, thickness of
which is to be measured after wetting. If the straw or hay covering
becomes displaced during the curing period, it shall be replaced to
the original depth and saturated. It shall be kept thoroughly saturated
with water for 72 hours and thoroughly wetted down during the
morning of the fourth day, and the cover shall remain in place until the
concrete has attained the required strength.
h.4 Impervious Membrane Method
The entire surface of the pavement shall be sprayed uniformly with

white pigmented curing compound immediately after the finishing of
the surface and before the set of the concrete has taken place, or if
the pavement is cured initially with jute or cotton mats, it may be
applied upon removal of the mass. The curing compound shall not be
applied during rain.
Curing compound shall be applied under pressure at the rate of 4 L

to not more than 14 m² by mechanical sprayers. The spraying
equipment shall be equipped with a wind guard. At the time of use,
the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with the
pigment uniformly dispersed throughout the vehicle. During
application, the compound shall be stirred continuously by effective
mechanical means. Hand spraying of odd widths or shapes and
concrete surface exposed by the removal of forms will be permitted.
Curing compound shall not be applied to the inside faces of joints to
be sealed, but approved means shall be used to ensure proper curing
at least 72 hours and to prevent the intrusion of foreign material into
the joint before sealing has been completed. The curing compound
shall be of such character that the film will harden within 30 minutes
after application. Should the film be damaged from any cause within
the 72 hour curing period, the damaged portions shall be repaired
immediately with additional compound.
Page 48
h.5 White Polyethylene Sheet
The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered
with polyethylene sheeting. The units used shall be lapped at least 45
cm. The sheeting shall be so placed and weighted down so as to
cause it to remain intimate contact with the surfaced covered. The
sheeting as prepared for use shall have such dimension that each unit
as laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the
thickness of the pavement. Unless otherwise specified, the covering
shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the concrete has been
placed.
i. Removal of Forms
Forms for concrete shall remain in place undisturbed for not less than twenty-
four (24) hours after pouring. In the removal of forms, crowbars should be
used in pulling out nails and pins. Care should be taken so as not to break
the edges of the pavement. In case portions of the concrete are spalled, they
shall be immediately repaired with fresh mortar mixed in the proportion of one
part of Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregates. Major honeycomb
areas will be considered as defective work, and shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Any area or section so removed
shall not be less than the distance between weakened plane joint nor less
than the full width of the lane involved.
j. Sealing Joints
Joints shall be sealed soon after completion of the curing period and before
the pavement is opened to traffic, including the Contractor's equipment. Just
prior to sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign materials
including membrane curing compound and the joint faces shall be cleaned
and surface dry when the seal is applied.
The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening to conform to the
details shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Materials for seal
applied hot shall be stirred during heating so that localized overheating does
not occur. The pouring shall be done in such a manner that the material will
not be spilled on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. The use of sand or
similar material as a cover for the seal will not be permitted.
Preformed elastomeric gasket for sealing joints shall be of the cross-sectional

dimensions shown on the plans. Seal shall be installed by suitable tools,
without elongation and secured in place with an approved lubricant adhesive
which shall cover both sides of the concrete joints. The seals shall be
installed in a compressive condition and shall at time of placement be below
the level of the pavement surface by approximately 6mm.
The seals shall be in one piece for the full width of each transverse joint.
Page 49
k. Pavement Protection
Keep pavement closed to vehicular traffic until the concrete is more than 7
days old and has attained a minimum flexural strength of 3.10 MPa as
determined by tests of the field-cured test beams. At that time the pavement
may be opened to limited traffic. Prevent damage to edges of slabs if
subgrade planer, concrete finishing machine, or similar equipment is
supported on previously constructed slabs. After the concrete has reached
the specified 28 days flexural strength as verified by the laboratory-cured test
beams, equipment with the wheel loads capacity exceeding 2,280 kg may be
used for transporting concrete or heavy equipment with the prior approval of
the Engineer.
l. Acceptance of Concrete
l.1 Test for Flexural Strength
During the progress of the work, verify the flexural strength by testing
beams made from concrete taken from the forms at intervals indicated
herein. Mold and cure beams in accordance with ASTM C31.
Perform tests in accordance with ASTM C78. Mold at least 8 beams
each day from concrete placed that day. Select one group of four
beams at the beginning of the work and a second group of four beams
near the end of concrete placement. An approved laboratory shall
furnish all necessary labor, concrete and facilities for molding,
handling, and storing the beams at the site of the work and testing the
beams. Perform tests at 7 days and 28 days.
Flexural Strength - Concrete shall meet the following requirements:
a. From each group of concrete beams, three beams tested

at the end of 28 days shall have an average flexural strength
equal to or greater than the specified strength.
b. No individual beam of the three beams tested shall have a

flexural strength less than 3.80 MPa. Defective beams shall
be discarded.
c. One beam of the group shall be tested at 7 days. If the ratio

of the 7-day strength to the specified 28-day strength is less
than 65 percent or if the concrete strength does not meet other
requirements of this specification, the Contractor shall make
all additional tests to provide evidence as to the conformance
of the concrete works to the specifications. Concrete deemed
to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected
unless the Contractor can provide evidence by means of core
test that the quality of concrete represented by failed test
results is acceptable in place.
Page 50
l.2 Core Test
At least three (3) representative cores shall be taken from each

member or area of concrete in place that is considered deficient. The
location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so that there
will be least impairment of the strength of the structure. The obtaining
and testing of drilled cores shall be in accordance with AASHTO T24.
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered

adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85%
of, and if no single core is less than 75% of, the specified strength, fc'.
If the strength of the control specimens does not meet the

requirements of this Subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable
to obtain cores from the structure due to structural considerations,
payment of the concrete will be made at an adjusted price due to
strength deficiency of concrete specimens as specified hereunder:
Deficiency in Strength of Concrete Percent (%) of Contract Price

Specimens, Percent (%) Allowed
Less than 5 100
5 to less than 10 80
25 or more 0
The volume of concrete represented by the sample shall be demolished

and replaced by new concrete.
l.3 Test for Pavement Thickness
The thickness of the pavement will be determined by measurement

of cores from the completed pavement in accordance in AASHTO
T148.
The completed pavement shall be accepted on a lot basis. A lot shall

be considered as 1000 linear meters of pavement when a single traffic
lane is poured or 500 linear meters when two lanes are poured
concurrently. The last unit in each slab constitutes a lot in itself when
its length is at least 1/2 of the normal lot length, it shall be included in
Page 51
the previous lot. Other areas such as the intersections, entrances,
crossovers, ramps, etc., will be grouped together to form a lot. Small
irregular areas may be included with other unit areas to form a lot.
Each lot will be divided into five (5) equal segments and one core will
be obtained from each segment in accordance with AASHTO T24.
In calculating the average thickness of the pavement, individual

measurements which are in excess of the specified thickness by more
than 5mm will be considered as the specified thickness plus 5mm and
measurement which are less than the specified thickness by more
than 25mm shall not be included in the average. When average
thickness for the lot is deficient, the contract unit price will be adjusted
for thickness in accordance with the table below. Individual areas
within a segment found deficient in thickness by more than 25mm
shall be evaluated by the Engineer, and if in his judgment, the
deficient areas warrant removal, they shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor with pavement of the specified thickness at his
entire expense.
When the measurement of any core is less than the specified

thickness by more than 25mm, the actual thickness of the pavement
in this area will be determined by taking additional cores at not less
than 5m intervals parallel to the centerline in each direction from the
affected locations until a core is found in each direction which is not
deficient in thickness by more than 25mm. The thickness of the
remainder of the segment to be used to get the average thickness of
each lot shall be determined by taking the average thickness of the
additional cores which are not deficient by more than 25mm.
Adjustment of Thickness - When the average thickness of the

pavement per lot is deficient, payment for the lot shall be adjusted as
follows:
Deficiency in the Average Thickness Per Percent of Contract Price Per Lot
Lot (mm)
0–5 100% payment
6 – 10 95% payment
11 – 15 85% payment
16 – 20 70% payment
21 – 25 50% payment
Page 52
More than 25 Remove and Replace Concrete
(No Payment)
m. Opening to Traffic
The Engineer will decide when the pavement may be opened to traffic. The
road will not be opened until test specimens molded and cured have attained
the minimum strength requirements. If such tests are not conducted prior to
the specified age, the pavement shall not be opened to traffic until 14 days
after the concrete was placed. Before opening to traffic, the pavement shall
be cleaned and joint sealing completed.
PART G. DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES
ITEM 404 REINFORCING STEEL
404(1) Reinforcing Steel Bar
1. Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, fabricating and placing of steel
reinforcement of the type, size, shape and grade required in accordance with
this Specification and in conformity with the requirements shown on the Plans
or as directed by the Engineer.
2. Material Requirement
Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of item 710, Reinforcing

Steel and Wire Rope.
ITEM 710 REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE
710 Reinforcing steel
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the following

Specifications:
Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for AASHTO M 31 (ASTM A 615)

Concrete Reinforcement
Deformed Steel Wire for AASHTO M 225 (ASTM A 496)

Welded Steel Wire Fabric for AASHTO M 55 (ASTM A 185)

Page 53
Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for AASHTO M 32 (ASTM A 82)
Fabricated Steel Bar or Rod AASHTO M 54 (ASTM A 184)

Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement
Welded Deformed Steel Wire AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A 497)

Fabric of Concrete
Reinforcement
Plastic Coated Dowel Bars AASHTO M 254 Type A
Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars ASTM A 206

for Concrete Reinforcement
Bar reinforcement for concrete structures, except No. 2 bars shall be

deformed in accordance with AASHTO M 42, M 31 and M 53 for Nos. 3
through 11.
Dowel and tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31

or AASHTO M 42 except that rail steel shall not be used for tie bars that
are to be bent and restraightened during construction. Tie bars shall be
deformed bars. Dowel bars shall be plain round bars. They shall be free
from burring or other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete.
Before delivery to the site of the work, a minimum of one half (1/2) the
length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one coat of approved lead
or tar paint.
The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of an approved design to

cover 50 mm (2 inches), plus or minus 6.3 mm of the dowel, with a
closed end, and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least
25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel bar. Sleeves shall be of such
design that they do not collapse during construction.
Plastic coated dowel bar conforming to AASHTO M 254 may be used.
Wire Rope or Wire Cable
The wire rope or wire cable shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M 30 for the specified diameter and strength class.
Prestressing Reinforcing Steel
Prestressing reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the

following Specifications:
Page 54
High-tensile wire AASHTO M 204 (ASTM A 421)
High-tensile wire strand or rope AASHTO M 203 (ASTM A 416)
High-tensile alloy bars asfollows:
High-tensile-strengthalloybarsshallbecoldstretchedtoaminimumof895.7
MPa (30,000 psi). The resultant physical properties shall be asfollows:
Minimum Ultimate tensile 1000 MPa followed by stress

strength relieving
Minimum yield strength, 895.7MPa

measured by the 0.7 percent
extension under load method
shall not be less than
Minimum modulus of elasticity 25,000,000
Minimum elongation in 20 bar 4 percent

diameter after rupture
Diameters tolerance +0.762 mm - 0.254 mm
If shown on the Plans, type 270 k strand shall be used, conforming to

AASHTO M 203.
3. Construction Requirement
A. Order Lists
Before materials are ordered, all order lists and bending

diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor, for approval of the
Engineer. The approval of order lists and bending diagrams by
the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for the correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any
expense incident to the revisions of materials furnished in
accordance with such lists and diagrams to make them comply
with the Plans shall be borne by the Contractor.
B. Protection of Material
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the

ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports and shall be
protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and
surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions
producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be
free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose scale, paint, grease, oil, or
Page 55
other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from
injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface
seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for
rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross sectional
area and tensile properties of a hand wire brushed specimen
meets the physical requirements for the size and grade of steel
specified.
C. Bending
All reinforcing bars requiring bending shall be cold-bent to the

shapes shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer. Bars
shall be bent around a circular pin having the following diameters
(D) in relation to the diameter of the bar (d):
Nominal diameter, d, mm Pin diameter (D)
10 to20 6d
8d
25 to28
10d
32 and greater
Bends and hooks in stirrups or ties may be bent to the diameter

of the principal bar enclosed therein.
D. Placing and Fastening
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position

shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and firmly held
there during the placing and setting of the concrete. Bars shall be
tied at all intersections except where spacing is less than 300mm
in each direction, in which case, alternate intersections shall be
tied. Ties shall be fastened on the inside.
Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays,

blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved supports, so that it does
not vary from the position indicated on the Plans by more than
6mm. Blocks for holding reinforcement from contact with the
forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shapes and
dimensions. Layers of bars shall be separated by precast mortar
blocks or by other equally suitable devices. The use of pebbles,
pieces of broken stone or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks
shall not be permitted. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or
required by the Engineer, the minimum distance between bars
shall be 40mm. Reinforcement in any member shall be placed
and then inspected and approved by the Engineer before the
placing of concrete begins. Concrete placed in violation of this
Page 56
provision may be rejected and removal may be required. If fabric
reinforcement is shipped in rolls, it shall be straightened before
being placed. Bundled bars shall be tied together at not more than
1.8m intervals.
E. Splicing
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated

on the Plans. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Plans,
will not be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer.
Splices shall be staggered as far as possible and with a minimum
separation of not less than 40 bar diameters. Not more than one-
third of the bars may be spliced in the same cross-section, except
where shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, bars shall be lapped a

minimumdistance of:
Splice Type Grade 40 Grade 60 But not less

min. lap min. lap than
Tension 24 bar dia 36 bar dia 300 mm
Compression 20 bar dia 24 bar dia 300 mm
In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired

together. Lapped splices will not be permitted at locations where
the concrete section is insufficient to provide minimum clear
distance of one and one-third the maximum size of coarse
aggregate between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar.
Welding of reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the
Plans or if authorized by the Engineer in writing. Spiral
reinforcement shall be spliced by lapping at least one and a half
turns or by butt welding unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
F. Lapping of Bar Mat
Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overlap each

other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be
securely fastened at the ends and edges. The overlap shall not
be less than one mesh in width.
The quantity of reinforcing steel to be paid for will be the final quantity
placed and accepted in the completed structure.
No allowance will be made for tie-wires, separators, wire chairs and

other material used in fastening the reinforcing steel in place. If bars are
Page 57
substituted upon the Contractor’s request and approved by the Engineer
and as a result thereof more steel is used than specified, only the mass
specified shall bemeasured for payment.
No measurement or payment will be made for splices added by the

Contractor unless directed or approved by the Engineer.
When there is no item for reinforcing steel in the Bill of Quantities, costs
will be considered as incidental to the other items in the Bill of Quantities.
5. Basis for Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 404.4, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Reinforcing Steel which price
and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
404 Reinforcing Steel Kilogram
ITEM 405 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
405(1) Structural Concrete
1. Description
A. Scope
This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, placing and finishing

concrete in all structures except pavements in accordance with this
Specification and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions
shown on the Plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland
Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, admixture when specified,
and water mixed in the proportions specified or approved by the
Engineer.
B. Classes and Uses of Concrete
Five classes of concrete are provided for in this Item, namely: A, B, C,

P and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of the structure as
called for on the Plans.
The classes of concrete will generally be used as follows:
Page 58
Class A – All superstructures and heavily reinforced substructures. The
important parts of the structure included are slabs, beams, girders,
columns, arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments, retaining walls,
and reinforced footings.
Class B – Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding, and

gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of reinforcement.
Class C – Thin reinforced sections, railings, precast R.C. piles and

cribbing and for filler in steel grid floors.
Class P – Prestressed concrete structures and members.
Seal – Concrete deposited in water.
A. Portland Cement
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.1.
311.2.1 Portland Cement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic

Cement. Only Type I Portland Cement shall be used unless otherwise
provided for in the Special Provisions. Different brands or the same
brands from different mills shall not be mixed nor shall they be used
alternately unless the mix is approved by the Engineer. However, the
use of Portland Pozzolan Cement Type IP meeting the requirements of
AASHTO M 240/ASTM C 695, Specifications for Blended Hydraulic
Cement shall be allowed, provided that trial mixes shall be done and
that the mixes meet the concrete strength requirements, the
AASHTO/ASTM provisions pertinent to the use of Portland Pozzolan
Type IP shall be adopted.
Cement which for any reason, has become partially set or which
contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from
discarded orused bags shall not be used.
Samples of Cement shall be obtained in accordance with AASHTO T

127.
B. Fine Aggregate
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.2.
311.2.2 Fine Aggregate
It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert materials

with similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard,
Page 59
strong and durable particles. Fine aggregate from different sources of
supply shall not be mixed or stored in the same pile nor used alternately
in the same class of concrete without the approval of the Engineer.
It shall not contain more than three (3) mass percent of material passing
the 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more than one (1) mass
percent each of clay lumps or shale. The use of beach sand will not be
allowed without the approval of the Engineer.
If the fine aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate
soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 10 mass percent.
The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of organic

impurities. If subjected to the colorimatic test for organic impurities and
a color darker than the standard is produced, it shall be rejected.
However, when tested for the effect of organic impurities of strength of
mortar by AASHTO T 71, the fine aggregate may be used if the relative
strength at 7 and 28 days is not less than 95 mass percent.
The fine aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine and shall
conform to Table 311.1
Table 311.1 - Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregate
9.5 mm (3/8 in) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 95 – 100
2.36 mm (No. 8) -
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45 – 80
0.600 mm (No. 30) -
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5 – 30
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0 – 10
C. Coarse Aggregate
It shall conform all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.3 except that

gradation shall conform to Table 405.1.
Table 405.1 - Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate
Page 60
Standard Alternate Grading Grading Grading
Mm A B C
U.S.
Standard
75.00 3 in. 100 - -
63.00 2-1/2 in. 90-100 100 100
50.00 2 in. - 90-100 95-100
37.5 1-1/2 in. 25-60 35-70 -
25.0 1 in. - 0-15 35-70
19.0 ¾ in. 0-10 - -
12.5 ½ in. 0-5 0-5 10-30
4.75 No. 4 - - 0-5
* The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2
mass percent of the design cement content.
D. Water
It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4.
311.2.4 Water
Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall be

reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other
substances injurious to the finished product. Water will be tested in
accordance with and shall meet the requirements of Item 714, Water.
Water which is drinkable may be used without test. Where the source of
water is shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud,
grass or other foreign materials.
E. Reinforcing Steel
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and

Wire Rope.
F. Admixtures
Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.8.
311.2.8 Admixtures
Page 61
Air-entraining admixture shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 154.
Chemical admixtures, if specified or permitted, shall conform to the

requirements of AASHTO M 194.
Fly Ash, if specified or permitted as a mineral admixture and as 20%

partial replacement of Portland Cement in concrete mix shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM C 618.
Admixture should be added only to the concrete mix to produce some

desired modifications to the properties of concrete where necessary,
but not as partial replacement of cement. If specified, monofilament
polypropylene synthetic fibrin fibers, which are used as admixture to
prevent the formation of temperature / shrinkage cracks and increase
impact resistance of concrete slabs, shall be applied in the dosage rate
recommended by its manufacturer.
G. Curing Materials
Curing materials shall conform to the requirements of Subsection

311.2.9.
Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements as

specified;
a. Burlap Cloth - AASHTO M 182
b. Liquid membrane forming compounds - AASHTO M 148
c. Sheeting (film) materials - AASHTO M 174
Cotton mats and water-proof paper can beused.
H. Expansion Joint Materials
Expansion joint materials shall be:
a. Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork, conforming to AASHTO M

153.
b. Hot-Poured Elastic Type, conforming to AASHTO M 173.
c. Performed Fillers, conforming to AASHTO M 213.
I. Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals
These shall conform to AASHTO M 220.
J. Elastomeric Bearing Pads
Page 62
These shall conform to AASHTO M 251 or Item 412 - Elastomeric Bearing
Pads.
K. Storage of Cement and Aggregates
Storage of cement and aggregates shall conform to all the requirements of

Subsection 311.2.11.
311.2.11 Storage of Cement and Aggregate
All cement shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site, in

weatherproof building which will protect the cement from dampness.
The floor shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be placed
in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be
ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately
stored in such a manner as to allow the earliest deliveries to be used
first and to provide easy access for identification and inspection of each
shipment. Storage buildings shall have capacity for storage of a
sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least twelve (12) days
before the cement is to be used. Bulk cement, if used, shall be
transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. Stored cement
shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when retest
is ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use, all cement shall be free-
flowing and free of lumps.
The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to

prevent segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer
may require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at
satisfactory locations.
In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer

mayrequire that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or more
sizes. Different sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate bins or in
separate stockpiles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the
material at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed.
3. Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete
As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three (3) concrete
cylinder test specimens, 150 x 300mm (6 x 12 inches), shall be taken from
each seventy-five (75) cubic meters of each class of concrete or fraction
thereof placed each day.
Compliance with the requirements of this Section shall be determined in

accordance with the following standard methods of AASHTO:
Sampling of fresh concrete T 141
Page 63
Weight per cubic meter and air
T 121
content (gravi-metric) of concrete
T 27
Sieve Analysis of fine and coarse
aggregates
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete T 119
Specific gravity and absorption of fine

T 84
aggregate
Test for strength shall be made in accordance with the following:
Making and curing concrete T 23

compressive and flexural tests
specimens in the field
Compressive strength of molded T 22

concrete Cylinders
4. Production Requirements
A. Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete
The concrete materials shall be proportioned in accordance with the

requirements for each class of concrete as specified in Table 405.2,
using the absolute volume method as outlined in the American
Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1. “Recommended Practice for
Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete”. Other
methods of proportioning may be employed in the mix design with prior
approval of the Engineer. The mix shall either be designed or
approved by the Engineer. A change in the source of materials during
the progress of work may necessitate a new mix design.
The strength requirements for each class of concrete shall be as

specified in Table 405.2.
Table 405.2 - Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in

Structures
Page 64
Minimum Maximum Consistency Designated Minimum
Cement Water/ Range in Size of Coarse CompressiveStre
Class of Content Cement Slump Aggregate ngth of
Concrete Per m3 Ratio 150x300mm
Concrete
kg Cylinder
(bag**) Square Opening Specimen at 28
kg/kg Std. mm days, MN/m2
mm (inch) (psi)
A 360 0.53 50 – 100 37.5 – 4.75 20.7
(9 bags) (2 – 4) (1-1/2” – No. 4) (3000)
B 320 0.58 50 – 100 50 – 4.75 16.5
(8 bags) (2 – 4) (2” – No. 4) (2400)
C 380 0.55 50 – 100 12.5 – 4.75 20.7
(9.5 bags) (2 – 4) (1/2” – No. 4) (3000)
P 440 0.49 100 max. 19.0 – 4.75 37.7
(11 bags) (4 max.) (3/4” – No. 4) (5000)
Seal 380 0.58 100 – 200 25 – 4.75 20.7
(9.5 bags) (4 - 8) (1” – No. 4) (3000)
* The measured cement content shall be within plus or minus 2

mass percent of the design cementcontent.
** Based on 40 kg/bag
B. Consistency
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable

in the required position. It shall be of such a consistency that it
will flow around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the
coarse aggregate when isolated shall show a coating of mortar
containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of
concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to
properly place it and not by the difficulty in mixing and
transporting. The quantity of mixing water shall be determined
by the Engineer and shall not be varied without his consent.
Page 65
Concrete as dry as it is practical to place with the equipment
specified shall be used.
C. Batching
Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batching plant.
a. Portland Cement
Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of

a sack of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete
unless the cement is weighed. All bulk cement shall be
weighed on an approved weighing device. The bulk
cement weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and
vented to preclude dusting operation. The discharge
chute shall not be suspended from the weighing hopper
and shall be so arranged that cement will neither be
lodged in it nor leak from it.
Accuracy of batching shall be within plus (+) or minus (-)

1 masspercent.
b. Water
Water may be measured either by volume or by weight.

The accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a
range of error of not more than 1 percent.
c. Aggregates
Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in accordance with

Subsection 311.2.10. All aggregates whether produced or
handled by hydraulic methods or washed, shall be stockpiled or
binned for draining for at least 12 hours prior to batching. Rail
shipment requiring more than12 hours will be accepted as
adequate binning only if the car bodies permit free drainage. If
the aggregates contain high or non-uniform moisture content,
storage or stockpile period in excess of 12 hours may be
required by the Engineer.
Batching shall be conducted as to result in a 2 mass percent

maximum tolerance for the required materials.
d. Bins and Scales
The batching plant shall include separate bins for bulk

cement, fine aggregate and for each size of coarse
aggregate, a weighing hopper, and scales capable of
determining accurately the mass of each component of
the batch.
Page 66
Scales shall be accurate to one-half (0.5) percent
throughout the range used.
e. Batching
When batches are hauled to the mixer, bulk cement shall

be transported either in waterproof compartments or
between the fine and coarse aggregate. When cement is
placed in contact with moist aggregates, batches will be
rejected unless mixed within 1-1/2 hours of such contact.
Sacked cement may be transported on top of the
aggregates.
Batches shall be delivered to the mixer separate and

intact. Each batch shall be dumped cleanly into the mixer
without loss, and, when more than one batch is carried on
the truck, without spilling of material from one batch
compartment into another.
f. Admixtures
The Contractor shall follow an approved procedure for

adding the specified amount of admixture to each batch
and will be responsible for its uniform operation during the
progress of the work. He shall provide separate scales for
the admixtures which are to be proportioned by weight,
and accurate measures for those to be proportioned by
volume. Admixtures shall be measured into the mixer with
an accuracy of plus or minus three (3) percent.
The use of Calcium Chloride as an admixture will not be

permitted.
D. Mixing and Delivery
Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central

point or by a combination of central point and truck mixing or by
a combination of central point mixing and truck agitating. Mixing
and delivery of concrete shall be in accordance with the
appropriate requirements of AASHTO M 157 except as modified
in the following paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a
combination of central point and truck mixing or truck agitating.
Delivery of concrete shall be regulated so that placing is at a
continuous rate unless delayed by the placing operations. The
intervals between delivery of batches shall not be so great as to
allow the concrete in place to harden partially, and in no case shall
such an interval exceed 30 minutes.
Page 67
In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are
authorized, for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. per day
of pouring, the weight proportions shall be converted to
equivalent volumetric proportions. In such cases, suitable
allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture condition
of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine
aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with
ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9.
Concrete mixing, by chute is allowed provided that a weighing

scales for determining the batch weight will be used.
For batch mixing at the site of construction or at a central point,

a batch mixer of an approved type shall be used. Mixer having a
rated capacity of less than a one-bag batch shall not be used.
The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the
mixer’s nominal capacity as shown on the manufacturer’s
standard rating plate on the mixer except that an overload up to
10 percent above the mixer’s nominal capacity may be permitted,
provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and
uniform consistency are satisfactory and provided no spillage of
concrete takes place. The batch shall be so charge into the drum
that a portion of the water shall enter in advance of the cement
and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water
shall be in the drum by the end of the first 15 seconds of the
mixing period. Mixing time shall be measured from the time all
materials, except water, are in the drum. Mixing time shall not be
less than 60 seconds for mixers having a capacity of 1.5m3 or
less. For mixers having a capacity greater than 1.5m3, the mixing
time shall not be less than 90 seconds. If timing starts, the instant
the skip reaches its maximum raised position, 4 seconds shall be
added to the specified mixing time. Mixing time ends when the
discharge chute opens.
The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the

manufacturer’s name plate on the mixer. Any concrete mixed
less than the specified time shall be discarded and disposed off
by the Contractor at his own expenses.
The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a

bell or other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly
audible signal each time the lock is released. In case of failure of
the timing device, the Contractor will be permitted to continue
operations while it is being repaired, provided he furnishes an
approved timepiece equipped with minute and second hands. If
the timing device is not placed in good working order within 24
hours, further use of the mixer will be prohibited until repairs are
made.
Page 68
Retempering concrete will not be permitted. Admixtures for
increasing the workability, for retarding the set, or for
accelerating the set or improving the pumping characteristics of
the concrete will be permitted only when specifically provided for
in the Contract, or authorized in writing by the Engineer.
a. Mixing Concrete: General
Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an

approved size and type that will insure a uniform
distribution of the materials throughout the mass.
All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated

mixers. Mixing plant and equipment for transporting and
placing concrete shall be arranged with an ample auxiliary
installation to provide a minimum supply of concrete in
case of breakdown of machinery or in case the normal
supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply of
concrete shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a
section up to a construction joint that will meet the
approval of the Engineer.
Equipment having components made of aluminum or

magnesium alloys, which would have contact with plastic
concrete during mixing, transporting or pumping of
Portland Cement concrete, shall not be used.
Concrete mixers shall be equipped with adequate water

storage and a device of accurately measuring and
automatically controlling the amount of water used.
Materials shall be measured by weighing. The apparatus

provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be
suitably designed and constructed for this purpose. The
accuracy of all weighing devices except that for water
shall be such that successive quantities can be measured
to within one percent of the desired amounts. The water
measuring device shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5
mass percent. All measuring devices shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer. Scales and measuring
devices shall be tested at the expense of the Contractor
as frequently as the Engineer may deem necessary to
ensure their accuracy.
Weighing equipment shall be insulated against vibration

or movement of other operating equipment in the plant.
When the entire plant is running, the scale reading at cut-
off shall not vary from the weight designated by the
Engineer more than one mass percent for cement, 1-1/2
Page 69
mass percent for any size of aggregate, or one (1) mass
percent for the total aggregate in any batch.
b. Mixing Concrete at Site
Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the

revolving blade type and the mixing drum or blades shall
be operated uniformly at the mixing speed recommended
by the manufacturer. The pick-up and throw-over blades
of mixers shall be restored or replaced when any part or
section is worn 20mm or more below the original height
of the manufacturer’s design. Mixers and agitators which
have an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar shall not
be used.
When bulk cement is used and volume of the batch is

0.5m3 or more, the scale and weigh hopper for Portland
Cement shall be separate and distinct from the aggregate
hopper or hoppers. The discharge mechanism of the bulk
cement weigh hopper shall be interlocked against
opening before the full amount of cement is in the hopper.
The discharging mechanism shall also be interlocked
against opening when the amount of cement in the
hopper is underweight by more than one (1) mass percent
or overweight by more than 3 mass percent of the amount
specified.
When the aggregate contains more water than the

quantity necessary to produce a saturated surface dry
condition, representative samples shall be taken and the
moisture content determined for each kind of aggregate.
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some

water will enter in advance of cement and aggregate. All
water shall be in the drum by the end of the first quarter
of the specified mixing time.
Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer so

that it will not result in loss of cement due to the effect of
wind, or in accumulation of cement on surface of
conveyors or hoppers, or in other conditions which reduce
or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete
mixture.
The entire content of a batch mixer shall be removed from

the drum before materials for a succeeding batch are
placed therein. The materials composing a batch except
water shall be deposited simultaneously into the mixer.
Page 70
All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1-
1/2 minutes after all materials, including water, are in the
mixer. During the period of mixing, the mixer shall operate
at the speed for which it has been designed.
Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device

that can be locked by the Engineer. The time device and
discharge mechanics shall be so interlocked that during
normal operation no part of the batch will be charged until
the specified mixing time has elapsed.
The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer

shall contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand, and
water to coat inside of the drum without reducing the
required mortar content of the mix. When mixing is to
cease for a period of one hour or more, the mixer shall be
thoroughly cleaned.
c. Mixing Concrete at Central Plant
Mixing at central plant shall conform to the requirements

for mixing at the site.
d. Mixing Concrete in Truck
Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the

Engineer, shall be of the revolving drum type, water-tight,
and so constructed that the concrete can be mixed to
insure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the
mass. All solid materials for the concrete shall be
accurately measured and charged into the drum at the
proportioning plant. Except as subsequently provided, the
truck mixer shall be equipped with a device by which the
quantity of water added can be readily verified. The
mixing water may be added directly to the batch, in which
case a tank is not required. Truck mixers may be required
to be provided with a means of which the mixing time can
be readily verified by the Engineer.
The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not

exceed the minimum rated capacity of the mixer as stated
by the manufacturer and stamped in metal on the mixer.
Truck mixing, shall, unless other-wise directed be
continued for not less than 100 revolutions after all
ingredients, including water, are in the drum. The mixing
speed shall not be less than 4 rpm, nor more than 6 rpm.
Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has

been added either to the water or aggregate, but when
Page 71
cement is charged into a mixer drum containing water or
surface wet aggregate and when the temperature is above
32oC, this limit shall be reduced to 15 minutes. The
limitation in time between the introduction of the cement
to the aggregate and the beginning of the mixing may be
waived when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the
aggregate is sufficiently free from moisture, so that there
will be no harmful effects on the cement.
When a truck mixer is used for transportation, the mixing

time specified in Subsection 405.4.4 (3) at a stationary
mixer may be reduced to 30 seconds and the mixing
completed in a truck mixer. The mixing time in the truck
mixer shall be as specified for truck mixing.
e. Transporting Mixed Concrete
Mixed concrete may only be transported to the delivery

point in truck agitators or truck mixers operating at the
speed designated by the manufacturers of the equipment
as agitating speed, or in non-agitating hauling equipment,
provided the consistency and workability of the mixed
concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable
point for adequate placement and consolidation in place.
Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the

manufacturer’sguaranteed capacity. They shall maintain
the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform
mass during hauling.
No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the

concrete during hauling or after arrival at the delivery
point.
The rate of discharge of mixed concrete from truck mixers

or agitators shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of
the drum in the discharge direction with the discharge
gate fully open.
When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transporting

concrete to the delivery point, discharge shall be
completed within one hour, or before 250 revolutions of
the drum or blades, whichever comes first, after the
introduction of the cement to the aggregates. Under
conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete
or when the temperature of the concrete is 30oC, or
above, a time less than one hour will be required.
f. Delivery of Mixed Concrete
Page 72
The Contractor shall have sufficient plant capacity and
transportation apparatus to ensure continuous delivery at
the rate required. The rate of delivery of concrete during
concreting operations shall be such as to provide for the
proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete.
The rate shall be such that the interval between batches
shall not exceed 20 minutes. The methods of delivering
and handling the concrete shall be such as will facilitate
placing of the minimum handling.
E. Method of Measurement
The quantity of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final

quantity placed and accepted in the completed structure. No
deduction will be made for the volume occupied by pipe less than
100mm (4 inches) in diameter or by reinforcing steel, anchors,
conduits, weep holes or expansion joint materials.
ITEM 500 PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAIN
500(1) Pipe Culverts (375mm., 450mm., 600mm., 750mm., 900mm., 1050mm., 1200mm., and
1500mm. diameters)
1. Description
This item shall consist of the construction or reconstruction of pipe culverts and
storm drains, hereinafter referred to as “conduit” in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as
established by the Engineer.
Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following specifications:
Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel AASHTO M 36

culverts and underdrains
Cast iron culvert pipe AASHTO M 64
Concrete sewer, storm drain and culvert pipe AASHTO M 86
Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and sewer AASHTO M 170

pipe
Bituminous coated corrugated metal culvert pipe AASHTO M 190

and pipe arches
Reinforced concrete arch culvert, storm drain and AASHTO M 206

sewer pipe
Page 73
Reinforced concrete elliptical culvert, storm drain AASHTO M 2017
and sewer pipe
Asbestos cement pipe for culverts and storm drains AASHTO M 217
Joint Mortar – Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 part, by volume of Portland
Cement and two (2) parts of approved sand with water as necessary to obtain the required
consistency.
Portland Cement and sand shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural
Concrete. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after its preparation.
Rubber gaskets AASHTO M198
Oakum – Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp (Cannavis
Sativa) line or Benares Sunn fiber or from a combination of these fibers. The oakum shall
be thoroughly corded and finished and practically free from lumps, dirt and extraneous
matter.
Hot poured joint sealing compound AASHTO M 173.
Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection500.3.2, Bedding.
Backfill material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling.
When the location of manufacturing plants allow, the plants will be inspected periodically
for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and material samples will be
obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with materials quality requirements. This
shall be the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as to quality.
Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the work, these materials will be subjected
to the latest inspection and approval of the Engineer.
A. Trenches Excavation
Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirement of Item 103,

Structure Excavation, to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the conduit
and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill materials under and around
the conduit. Where feasible, trench wall shall be vertical.
The completed trench bottom shall be firm for its full length and width. Where
required, in the case of crop drains, the trench shall have a longitudinal camber of
the magnitude specified.
When so specified on the Plans, the excavation for conduits placed in embankment
fill, shall be made after the embankment has been completed to the specified or
directed height above the designed grade of the conduit.
Page 74
B. Bedding
The bedding shall conform to one of the classes specified. When no bedding class
is specified, the requirements for Class C bedding shall apply.
Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle conforming to the

plan details.
Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less than 30
percent of the vertical outside diameter of the conduit. The minimum thickness of
bedding material beneath the pipe shall be 100 mm. The bedding material shall be
sand or selected sandy soil all of which passes a 9.5 mm sieve and not more than
10 percent of which passes a 0.075 mm sieve. The layer of the bedding material
shall be shaped to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of its total height. Recesses
in the trench bottom shall be shaped to accommodate the bell when bell and spigot
type conduit isused.
Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less than 10
percent of its total height. The foundation surface, completed in accordance with
Item 103, Structure Excavation, shall be shaped to fit the conduit and shall have
recesses shaped to receive the bells, if any.
For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped and a bedding blanket of sand
or fine granular material as specified above shall be provided as follows:
Pipe Corrugation Depth Minimum Bedding Depth
10 mm 25 mm
25 mm 50 mm
50 mm 75 mm
For large diameter structural plate pipes the shaped bed need not exceed
the width of bottom plate.
C. Laying Conduit
The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit line.
The lower segment of the conduit shall be in contact with the shaped
bedding throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduits and
outside circumferential laps of flexible conduits shall be placed facing
upstream. Flexible conduit shall be placed with longitudinal laps or seams at
the sides.
Page 75
Paved or partially-lined conduit shall be laid such that the longitudinal center
line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and
elliptically reinforced conduits shall be placed with the major axis within 5
degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the conduit.
D. Jointing Conduit
Rigid conduits may either be of bell and spigot or tongue and groove design
unless another type is specified. The method of joining conduit sections shall
be such that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably
flush and even.
Joints shall be made with (a) Portland Cement mortar, (b) Portland Cement
grout, (c) rubber gaskets, (d) oakum and mortar, (e) oakum and joint
compound, (f) plastic sealing compound, or by a combination of these types,
or any other type, as may be specified. Mortar joints shall be made with an
excess of mortar to form a continuous bead around the outside of the conduit
and finished smooth on the inside. For grouted joints, molds or runners shall
be used to retain the poured grout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed so
as to form a flexible water-tight seal. Where oakum is used, the joint shall be
called with this material and then sealed with the specified material.
When Portland Cement mixtures are used, the completed joints shall be
protected against rapid drying by any suitable covering material.
Flexible conduits shall be firmly joined by coupling bands.
Conduits shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe found to
be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be taken up and repaid
or replaced.
E. Field Strutting
When required by the Plans, vertical diameter of round flexible conduit shall
be increased 5 percent by shop elongation or by means of jacks applied after
the entire line of conduit has been installed on the bending but before
backfilling. The vertical elongation shall be maintained by means of sills and
struts or by horizontal ties shall be used on paved invertpipe.
Ties and struts shall be 300 mm in place until the embankment is completed
and compacted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
These construction specifications shall also apply in the case of re-laid

conduits. In addition, all conduits salvaged for relaying shall be cleaned of
all foreign materials prior toreinstallation.
F. Backfilling
Materials for backfilling on each side of the conduit for the full trench width
and to an elevation of 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall be fine,
Page 76
readily compactible soil or granular material selected from excavation or
from a source of the Contractor’s choice, and shall not contain stones that
would be retained on a 50 mm sieve, chunks of highly plastic clay, or other
objectionable material. Granular backfill material shall have not less than 95
percent passing a 12.5 mm sieve and not less than 95 percent retained on
a 4.75 mm sieve. Oversized material, if present, shall be removed at the
source of the material, except as directed by the Engineer.
When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the trench,
backfill material shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and
compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm (compacted) on both sides to
an elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit. Care shall be exercised
to thoroughly compact the backfill under the haunches of the conduit. The
backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit for the full
required length. Except where negative projecting embankment-type
installation is specified, the backfill material shall be placed and compacted
for the full depth of the trench.
When the top of the conduit is above the top of the trench, backfill shall be
placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not
exceeding 300 mm (compacted) and shall be brought up evenly on both
sides of the conduit for its full length to an elevation 300 mm above the top
of the conduit. The width of the backfill on each side of the conduit for the
portion above the top of the trench shall be equal to twice the diameter of
the conduit or 3.5 m, whichever is less. The backfill material used in the
trench section and the portion above the top of the trench for a distance on
each side of the conduit equal to the horizontal inside diameter and to 300
mm above the top of the conduit shall conform to the requirements for
backfill materials in this Subsection. The remainder of the backfill shall
consist of materials from excavation and borrow that is suitable for
embankment construction.
Compaction to the density specified in Item 104, Embankment, shall be

achieved by use of mechanical tampers or by rolling.
All conduits after being bedded and backfill as specified in this Subsection
shall be protected by one meter cover of fill before heavy equipment is
permitted to cross during construction of the roadway.
G. Imperfect trench
Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be completed as
described in Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling, to a height above the conduit
equal to the vertical outside diameter of the conduit plus 300 mm. A trench
equal in width to the outside horizontal diameter of the conduit and to the
length shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer shall then be
excavated to within 300 mm of the top of the conduit, trench walls being as
nearly vertical as possible. The trench shall be loosely filled with highly
Page 77
compressible soil. Construction of embankment above shall then proceed in
a normal manner.
Conduit of the different types and sizes, both new and re-laid, will be measured by
the linear meter in place. Conduit with sloped or skewed ends will be measured
along the invert.
Each section will be measured by the number of units installed.
Branch connection and elbows will be included in the length measurement for
conduit, or they may be measured by the number of units installed.
Class B bedding material placed and approved shall be measured by the cubic
meter in place.
When the Bid Schedule contains an estimated quantity for “Furnishing and Placing
Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert”, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of cubic
meter complete in place and accepted, measured in final position between limits as
follows:
A. Measurement shall include backfill material in the trench up to the top of

the original ground line but will not include any material placed outside of
vertical planes 450 mm up outside of and parallel to the inside wall of pipe
at its widest horizontal dimension.
B. When the original ground line is less than 300 mm above the top of the
pipe, the measurement will also include the placing of all backfill materials,
above the original ground line adjacent to the pipe for a height of 300 mm
above the top of pipe and for a distance on each side of the pipe not greater
than the widest horizontal dimension of thepipe.
C. The measurement shall include the placing of backfill material in all

trenches of the imperfect trench method. Materials re- excavated for
imperfect trench construction will be measured for payment under Item 103,
StructureExcavation.
5. Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities of conduit, determined as provided in Section 500.4,

Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter
for the conduit of the types and sizes specified complete in place. End sections and,
when so specified, branch connections and elbows, shall be paid for at the contract
unit price per piece for the kind and size specified complete in place.
Excavation for culverts and storm drains, including excavation below flow line grade
and for imperfect trench, shall be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103,
StructureExcavation.
Page 78
Concrete for Class A bedding will be paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete.
When the Bid Schedule does not contain as estimated quantity for “Furnishing and
Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert” payment for placing backfill material around
pipe culverts will be considered as included in the payment for excavation of the
backfill material.
Payment Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
500 (1) Pipe Culverts, - mm Linear Meter

Class -
Storm Drain, - mm
500 (2) Class - Linear Meter
ITEM 502 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS
502(1) Manholes (375mm., 450mm., 600mm., 750mm., 900mm., 1050mm., 1200mm., and
1500mm. diameters)
502(2)a Inlets
502(4) Concrete Covers (375mm., 450mm., 600mm., 750mm., 900mm., 1050mm., 1200mm., and
1500mm. diameters)
1. Description
This item shall consist of the construction, reconstruction or adjustment of manholes, inlets and
catch basins in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the
lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Concrete for these structures shall meet the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Other
materials shall meet the following specifications:
Corrugated Metal Units – The units shall conform to Plan dimensions and the metal to AASHTO
M 36. Bituminous coating, when specified, shall conform to ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion
for use as Protective Coating for Metal.
Sewer and manhole brick (Made AASHTO M 91

from clay or shale)
Page 79
Building brick (Solid masonry units AASHTO M 114
made from clay or shale)
Joint Mortar - Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joints mortar shall be composed of one
part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which hydrated lime has been
added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall
meet the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs – Metal units shall conform to the plan dimensions
and to the following specification requirements for the designated materials.
Metal gratings and covers which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly. They shall be
assembled before shipment and so marked that the same pieces may be reassembled readily in
the same position when installed. Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if
necessary. A frame and a grating or cover to be used with it shall constitute one pair.
All castings shall be uniformly coated with asphalt-based emulsion meeting the requirements of
ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating forMetal.
Samples of the material in casting shall be taken during the casting of the units and shall be
separate casting poured from the same material as the casting they represent.
Gray iron casting AASHTO M 105
Mild to medium-strength carbon steel AASHTO M 103

castings for general application
Structural Steel AASHTO M 183
Galvanizing, where specified for these AASHTO M 111

units, shall conform to the requirements
of
Reinforcing Steel AASHTO M 31
Pre-cast Concrete Units – These units shall be cast in substantial permanent steel forms.
Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20.682 MPa
(3000 psi). The pre-cast units shall be cured in accordance with AASHTO M 171. Water
absorption of individual cores taken from such units shall not exceed 7 percent. Additional
reinforcement shall be provided as necessary to provide for handling of the pre-castunits.
A sufficient number of cylinders shall be cast from the concrete for each unit permit compression
tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and to allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength
requirement is met at 7 or 14 days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of
casting. If the strength is not met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will berejected.
Page 80
Cracks in units, honeycombed or patched areas in excess of 2,000 square millimeters, excessive
water absorption and failure to meet strength requirements shall be the causes for rejection. Pre-
cast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 199.
The plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods,
and material samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material quality
requirements. This may be the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as the quality.
All materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest
practicable time the Engineer has the opportunity to check for compliance prior to or during
incorporation of materials into thework.
3. Construction Requirement
Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete.
Metal frames shall be set in full mortar bed. Pipe sections shall be flushed on the inside of the
structure wall and projected outside sufficiently for proper connection with next pipe section.
Masonry shall fit neatly and tightly around the pipe.
When grade adjustment or existing structures is specified, the frames, covers and gratings shall
be removed and the walls reconstructed as required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at the
required elevation. Upon completion, each structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt,
debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final
acceptance of the work.
Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation.
Standard manholes, inlets and catch basins, both new and reconstructed as applicable, will be
measured by the unit. Any additional concrete, reinforcing steel, or masonry required for
authorized increases in heights of structures paid off under this Item and in excess of the standard
height shown on the Plans will be measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete and
Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, as applicable. Structures noted on the Plans as “junction boxes” will
be measured for payment asmanholes.
The number of concrete covers, pairs of metal frames and gratings, and pairs of metal frames
and covers will be measured as acceptably completed.
The number of existing manholes, inlets and catch basins adjusted as directed will be measured
as acceptably completed.
5. Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 502.4, Method of Measurement of

the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the contract unit prices, which shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
Page 81
Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure
Excavation.
502 (1) Manholes Each
502 (2) Inlets, type Each
502 (4) Concrete covers Each
ITEM 510 CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION
510(2) Concrete Slope Protection
1. Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of concrete slope protection including
all necessary excavation, a bed course and reinforced concrete to the required thickness
and extent to protect slopes against erosion. Construction details shall be as shown on
the Plans.
A. Bed Course
A bed course, where required, shall be granular material which satisfies the
requirements for Item 200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A.
B. Formwork
Formwork, where necessary, shall be as specified in Item 407, Concrete

Structures.
C. Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Item 404, Reinforcing Steel.
D. Concrete
Concrete shall be Class B as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete, unless

otherwise specified or required by the Engineer.
Page 82
A. Excavation
The ground shall be excavated where necessary in accordance with the

dimensions, lines and grades shown on the Plans.
B. Bed Course
Where shown on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide and lay a bed course, to the depth required, and as specified in Item 200,
Aggregate Subbase Course, compacted at least 100 percent of the maximum dry
density as determined by AASHTO T 180, MethodD.
C. Concrete
The Contractor shall provide and place concrete in accordance with the
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, to the required depths in the
positions and to the grades and elevations shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise
specified, the concrete slabs shall not be greater than 4m by 4m and shall have
between slabs, plain vertical straight joints with no joint filler or sealer.
The toe of the concrete slope protection shall be constructed and protected a
shown on thePlans.
D. Drainage
Drainage of the bed course or backfill shall be provided as shown on the Plans or
as required by the Engineer.
The quantity of granular material in the bed course to be paid for shall be measured by
the cubic meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.
The quantity of concrete to be paid for shall be measured by the cubic meter in-place and
accepted as shown on the Plans.
5. Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities as provided in Section 510.4, Method of Measurement, shall be

paid for at the contract unit price according to the Pay Item in the Bid Schedule which price
and payment shall constitute full compensation for the necessary excavation, for all labor,
equipment, tools, all materials including formwork and reinforcing steel, and incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
Page 83
510 (1) Bed Course Granular Material Cubic meter in-place
510 (2) Concrete Cubic meter in-place
ITEM 511 GABIONS and MATTRESSES
511(1) Gabions
1. Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, forming wire mesh baskets, and placing rocks
installed at the locations designated, in accordance with this Specification and in
conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, and arrangements shown on the Plans or
as directed by the Engineer.
A. General
Gabions shall be constructed of wire mesh and shall be supplied in various lengths
and heights. A double twisted wire mesh container of variable sizes, uniformly
partitioned into internal cells, interconnected with other similar units, and filled with
stones at the project site to form flexible, permeable, monolithic structures such as
retaining walls, sea walls, channel linings, revetments and weirs for erosion
control. The lengths shall be multiples of 2, 3 or 4 times the width of the gabion
and heights shall be 0.50 m to 1.00 m or as shown on the plans. The horizontal
width shall not be less than one meter. Gabion furnished shall be of uniform width.
The width, height and length of the gabion as manufactured shall not differ more
Mattresses are double twisted wire mesh container uniformly partitioned into
internal cells with relatively small height in relation to other dimensions, having
smaller mesh openings than the mesh used for gabions. Mattresses are generally
used for riverbank protection and channel linings. The length shall be 3.00 m to
6.00 m, the width shall be 2.00 m and the height shall be 0.17 m, 0.23 m or 0.30
m or as shown on the Plans.
The width and length of the revet mattress as manufactured shall not differ more
than 5%, and
prior to filling.
B. Wire
Page 84
The wire used in the manufactured of double-twisted mesh for use in gabions and
mattresses shall conform to the specifications as shown below as appropriate for
the styleordered.
a. Style 1 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from zinc-coated

steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, Class 3 coating,
softtemper.
b. Style 2 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from Zn-5A1-MM-

coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 856/A 856 M, Class
3 coating, softtemper.
c. Style 3 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from the same type

of metallic-coated steel wire as style 1 with an additional PVC coating
extruded into the metallic-coated steel wire. The PVC coating shall conform
to the followingrequirements:
Test Method
1. Specific Gravity 1.30 to 1.35 D 792
2. Tensile Strength 20.6 MPa D 412
3. Modulus of Elasticity, min 18.6 MPa D 412
4. Hardness, shore "D" Between 50 & 60 D 2240
5. Brittleness Temp, max 90C (150F) or lower D 746
6. Resistance to Abrasion, % Temperature 12% D 1242

weight loss, max
The PVC coating shall not show cracks or breaks after the wires are twisted in the
fabrication of the mesh.
Style 4 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from aluminum-

coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 809, soft temper.
C. Lacing Wire and Stiffener
Lacing wire and stiffeners shall be made of wire having the same coating material
as the double-twisted wire mesh conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, A 856/A
856 M or A 809 with a tensile strength in accordance with subsection 509.2.7.
D. Fasteners made from zinc-coated steel wire, zinc - 5% aluminum mischmetal

alloy-coated steel wire and aluminum-coated steel shall conform to specification A
764, Type A, B, or C, Table 2 or Table3.
Page 85
E. Gabion and mattresses shall be manufactured with all components
mechanically connected at the production facility with the exception of the
mattresses lid which is produced separately from the base. All gabions and
mattresses shall be supplied in the collapsed form, either folded and bundled or
rolled, forshipping.
F. Dimensions
The minimum size of the galvanized and PVC coated wire to be used in the
fabrication of the gabion and mattresses shall be as follows:
Gabbions and Diameter, mm

Mattresses Wires
Gabion Mattresses
Metallic PVC Coated Metallic PVC

Coated Coated Coated
Body Wire 3.05 2.70 2.20 2.20
Selvedge or 3.80 3.40 2.70 2.70

Perimeter Wire
Tying and connecting 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20

Wire
Diameter Tolerances for Galvanized Wire to be used in the fabrication of gabion

and mattress shall be 10.
The nominal and the minimum thickness of PVC coating shall be0.50 mm and 0.38
mm, respectively.
G. Mechanical Properties
Tensile Strength – The tensile strength of Zinc-coated wire used in the fabrication
of gabion and mattresses when tested in accordance with Test Methods ASTM A
370, shall be as follows:
Strength, MPa
Gabions Mattresses
Body Wire 350-485 350-515
Selvedge or Perimeter 350-485 350-485

Wire
Page 86
Tying a Connecting 350-515 350-515
Wire
H. Weight and Coating
The minimum weight of zinc per unit area of uncoated wire surface shall be in
accordance with ASTM A 975 or asfollows:
Wire Diameter, mm Class 3 or A Coating, g/m2 , ASTM A

641
Over 1.90 to 2.30 220
Over 2.30 to 2.70 230
Over 2.70 to 3.10 240
Over 3.10 to 3.50 260
Over 3.50 to 3.90 270
I. Rock Fill
Rock used in the gabions and mattresses shall consist of hard, durable rock pieces
that will not deteriorate when submerged in water or exposed to severe weather
conditions. Rock pieces shall be generally uniformly graded in sizes ranging from
100 mm to 200 mm. Filled gabions shall have a minimum density of 1,400 kg/m 3.
Voids shall be evenly distributed.
No rock size shall exceed 2/3 the mattress depth and at least 85% by weight of the
stone shall have a size greater than 80 mm. No stones shall be able to pass
through themesh.
The rock shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 63 except that the sodium
sulphate soundness loss shall not exceed 9% after 5 cycles.
J. Filter Fabric
Filter cloth shall consist of 70% polypropylene and 30% polyethylene.
A. Fabrication
a. Gabions and mattresses shall be in the form of rectangular baskets of

the required dimensions and shall be manufactured from wire as specified
in Subsection 509.2.2. Gabions shall be made of steel wire double twisted
forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 8 x 10 having a nominal mesh
Page 87
openings of 83 by 114 mm. Mattresses shall be made of steel wire double
twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 6 x 8 having a nominal
mesh openings of 64 by 83 mm. Tolerances on the hexagonal, double-
twisted wire mesh ope
dimension D values, 64 mm for mattresses and 83 mm for gabions. The
edges shall be formed into a securely connected selvedge adequate to
prevent raveling.
Individual basket ties and connections shall be made by using a quantity of

wire not less than 8% of the weight of each basket.
b. When the gabion length exceeds its width, it shall have securely tied
diaphragms connected at all edges to form individual cells of equal length
and width.
Gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, lids and
diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular
baskets of the specified sizes. Gabions shall be of single unit construction,
base, lids, ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one
edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in
such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the point of connection is
at least equal to that of the mesh.
The gabion shall be equally divided by diaphragms, placed at not more

than 1.0 m intervals, and of the same mesh and gauge as the body of the
gabions, into cells the length of which does not exceed the horizontal width.
The gabion shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in
proper position on the base in such a manner that no additional tying at this
junction will benecessary.
c. Four cross-connecting wires shall be provided in each cell having a

height of one half the width or less, and eight cross-connecting wires shall
be provided in each cell having a height greater than one half the width.
All perimeter edge of the mesh forming the gabion shall be securely
selvedged so that the joints, by tying the selvedges, have at least the same
strength as the body of the mesh.
Selvedge wire used through all the edges (perimeter wire) shall not be less
than 3.80 mm diameter and shall meet the same specifications as the
wiremesh.
B. Assembly and Construction
a. Gabions shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. The gabions shall

be placed on a smooth foundation. Final line and grade shall be approved
by the Engineer.
Each gabion unit shall be assembled by binding together all vertical edges
with wire ties on approximately 152 mm (6 inches) spacing or by a
Page 88
continuous piece of connecting wire stitched around the vertical edges with
a coil every 102 mm (4 inches). Empty gabion units shall be set to line and
grade as shown on the Plans or as described by the Engineer. Wire ties or
connecting wires shall be used to join the units together in the same
manner as described above for assembling. Internal tie wires shall be
uniformly spaced and securely fastened in each cell of the structure.
A standard fence stretcher, chain fall, or iron rod may be used to stretch
the wire baskets and hold alignment.
b. When possible the subgrade of the mattress and gabion shall be properly
compacted to a depth of 150 mm. The Contractor shall consider the cost
of subgrade preparation in the unit prices. Filter fabric as beds of gabions
and mattresses forming the structure shall be suitably leveled and shall be
securely connected along the complete length of all contact edges by
means of the above specified tying and connecting wire.
c. Before the filling material is placed, the gabions and mattresses shall be
carefully selected for uniformity of size, and the pieces shall be hand placed
to provide a neat appearance as approved by the Engineer.
The gabions shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand or machine
to assure alignment and avoid bulges with a minimum void. Alternate
placing of rock and connection wires shall be performed until the gabion is
filled. After a gabion has been filled, the lid shall be bent over until it meets
the sides and edges. The lid shall then be secured to the sides, ends and
diaphragms with the wire ties or connecting wire in the manner described
for assembling.
The vertical joints of gabions and mattress baskets shall be staggered as

in running bond in brickwork.
d. The cells in any row shall be filled in stage so that local deformation may
be avoided. That is at no time shall the cell be filled to a depth exceeding
30 cm more than the adjoining cell.
e. Filter fabric shall be placed between earth surface and gabion or

mattress structures. Filter fabric shall be rolled out into a flat non- rutted
surface free from sharp objects, weighing down the edges. Construction
equipment shall not be allowed into unprotected fabric. Jointing is normally
affected by overlapping not less than 300 mm, but it is preferable to joint
by sewing or industrial stapling. Joint edges should be facing downwards
to avoid protruding through the surface material.
The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of gabions and mattresses
and the area of filter cloth completed and accepted.
5. Basis of Payment
Page 89
Quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit
price per unit of measurement for the Pay Item shown in the Bid Schedule, which price
and payment shall constitute full compensation for all necessary excavation, subgrade
preparation, for furnishing, placing wire baskets and fill materials and for all labor,
equipment accessories, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
511 (1) Gabions Cubic Meter
511 (2) Mattresses Cubic Meter
511 (3) Filter Cloth Square Meter
ITEM 513 PERMANENT GROUND ANCHORS
1. Description
This item shall consist of designing, furnishing, installing, testing and stressing permanent
cement -grouted ground anchors in accordance with the Plans, these specifications, and
the Special Provision.
2. Working Drawings
At least 30 days before work id to begin, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
review and approval complete working drawings and design calculations describing the
ground anchor system or systems intended for use. The submittal shall include the
following:
A. A ground anchor schedule giving the following information:
a. Ground anchor number

b. Ground anchor design load
c. Type and size of tendon
d. Minimum total anchor length
e. Minimum bond length
f. Minimum tendon bond length
g. Minimum unbonded length
B. A drawing of the ground anchor tendon and the corrosion protection system,
including details for the following:
a. Spacers separating elements of tendon and their location

b. Centralizers and their location
c. Unbonded length corrosion protection system
Page 90
d. Bond length corrosion protection system
e. Anchorage and trumpet
f. Anchorage corrosion protection system.
g. Drilled or formed hole size
h. Level of each stage of grouting, and
i. Transition between the unbonded length and the bond length corrosion
protection system.
C. The grout mix design and procedures for placing the grout.
The engineer shall approve or reject the Contractor's working drawings within 30
days of receipt of a complete submittal. No work on ground anchors shall begin
until working drawings have been approved in writing by the Engineer. Such
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility under the contract
for the successful completion of the work.
A. Prestressing Steel
Ground Anchor tendons shall consist of single or multiple elements of prestressing

steel, anchorage devices and, if requires, couplers. It shall also conform to any of
the following: AASHTO M 230MZ, AASHTO M 275M, ASTM A 779 and AASHTO
M 203M.
Couplers for tendon sections shall be capable of developing 95 percent of the

minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the tendon.
B. Grout
Cement shall be Type I, II, or III Portland Cement conforming to AASHTO M 85.
Cement used for grouting shall be fresh and shall not contain any lumps or other
indications of hydration or "pack set".
Grout shall be capable of reaching a cube strength (AASHTO T 106) of 25 MPa in

7 days. Grout cubes for testing shall be made from random batches of grout as
directed. Normally, grout strength testing shall not be required as system
performance shall be measured by proof-testing each ground anchor. Grout cube
testing shall be required if admixtures are used or irregularities occur in ground
anchor testing.
Aggregate shall conform to the requirements for fine aggregate described in

Structural Concrete.
Admixtures may be used in the grout subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Expansive admixtures may only be added to the grout used for filling sealed
encapsulations, trumpets, and anchorage covers. Accelerators shall not be used.
Page 91
Water for mixing grout shall be potable, cleaned and free of injurious quantities of
substances known to be harmful to Portland Cement or prestressing steel.
C. Centralizers
Centralizers and spacers shall be fabricated from any type of material, except
wood, that is not deleterious to the prestressing steel.
D. Steel Elements
Bearing plates shall be fabricated from steel conforming to AASHTO M 270 (ASTM
A 709) Grade 36+ minimum, or be a ductile iron casting conforming to ASTM A
536.
Trumpets used to provide a transition from the anchorage to the unbonded length
corrosion protection shall be fabricated from a steel pipe or tube conforming to the
requirements of ASTM A 53 for pipe or ASTM A 500 for tubing. Minimum wall
thickness shall be 5mm.
Anchorage covers used to enclose exposed anchorages shall be fabricated from

steel, steel pipe, steel tube, or ductile cast iron conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO M 270 (ASTM A 709) Grade 36 for steel, ASTM A 53 for pipe, ASTM a
500 for tubing and ASTM A 536for ductile cast iron. Minimum thickness shall be
2.5mm.
E. Corrosion Protection Elements
Sheath for the unbonded length of a tendon shall consist of one of the following:
a. Seamless polyethylene (PE) tube having a minimum wall thickness of

1.5 mm plus or minus 0.25 mm. The polyethylene shall be cell classification
334413 by ASTM D 3350.
b. Seamless polypropylene tube having a minimum wall thickness of 1.5

mm plus or minus 0.25 mm. The polypropylene shall be cell classification
PP210B55542-11 by ASTM D 4101.
c. Heat shrinkable tube consisting of a radiation cross linked polyolefin tube

internally coated with an adhesive sealant. The minimum tube wall
thickness before shrinking shall be 0.60 mm. The minimum adhesive
sealant thickness shall be 0.50 mm.
d. Corrugated polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tube having a minimum wall

thickness of 0.75 mm.
Encapsulation for the tendon bond length shall consist of one of the following:
Page 92
a. Corrugated high-density polyethylene (HDPE) tube having a minimum
wall thickness of 0.75 mm and conforming to AASHTO M 252
requirements.
b. Deformed steel tube or pipe having a minimum wall thickness of 0.625

mm.
c. Corrugated polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tube having a minimum wall

thickness of 0.75 mm.
d. Fusion-bonded epoxy conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M

284, except that it shall have a film thickness of 0.375 mm.
The type of sheath and encapsulation for the tendons selected shall be subjected
to the approval of the Engineer.
F. Miscellaneous Elements
Bond breaker for a tendon shall consist of smooth plastic tube or pipe that is
resistant to aging by ultra-violet light and that is capable of withstanding abrasion,
impact and bending during handling and installation.
Spacers for separation of elements of a multi-element tendon shall permit the free
flow of grout. They shall be fabricated from plastic, steel, or material which is not
detrimental to the prestressing steel. Wood shall not be used.
Centralizers shall be fabricated from plastic, steel, or material, which is not

detrimental to either the prestressing steel or any element of the tendon corrosion
protection. Woods shall not be used. The centralizer shall be able to maintain the
position of the tendon so that a minimum of 13 mm of grout cover is obtained on
the tendons, or over the encapsulation.
A. Fabrication
a. General
Tendons for ground anchors may be either shop or field fabricated from
materials conforming to the requirements of Prestressing Steel. Tendons
shall be fabricated as shown on the approved working drawings. The
tendon shall be sized to meet the following:
a.1 The design load does not exceed 60% of the minimum
guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the tendon.
a.2 The maximum test load does not exceed 80% of the minimum
guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the tendon
Page 93
b. Bond Length and Tendon Bond Length
The contractor shall determine the bond length necessary to develop the
design load indicated on the plans and to satisfy the load test requirements.
The minimum tendon bond length shall be 3 m in rock, 4.5 m in soil or as
shown on the Plans, which shall not be less than 3 m.
c. Grout Protected Ground Anchor Tendon
Spacers shall be placed along the tendon bond length of multi element
tendons to separate each of the individual elements so that the
prestressing strength will bond to the grout. They shall be located at 3 m
maximum centers with the upper one located a maximum of 1.5 m from the
top of the tendon bond length and the lower one located a maximum of 1.5
m from the bottom of the tendon bond length.
Centralizers shall be placed along the bond length. They shall be located
at 3 m maximum center-to-center spacing with the upper one located a
maximum of 1.5 m from the top of the tendon bond length and the lower
one located 0.30 m from the bottom of the tendon bond length. Use
centralizers that do not impede the free flow of grout up the borehole.
Centralizers are not required on tendons installed utilizing a hollow-stem
auger if it is grouted through the auger and the drill hole is maintained full
of a stiff grout (less than 22.5 cm slump) during extraction of the auger. A
combination centralizer-spacer may be used.
Centralizers are not required on tendons installed utilizing a pressure

injection system in coarse-grained soils using grouting pressures greater
than 1 MPa.
d. Encapsulation Protected Ground Anchor Tendon
Where encapsulation of the tendon is required, the tendon bond length

shall be encapsulated by a grout-filled corrugated plastic or deformed steel
tube, or by a fusion-bonded epoxy coating. The tendon can be grouted
inside the encapsulation prior to inserting the tendon in the drill hole or after
the tendon has been placed in the drill hole. Punching holes in the
encapsulation and allowing the grout to flow from the encapsulation to the
drill hole, or vice versa, will not be permitted. The tendon shall be
centralized within the encapsulation and the tube sized to provide a
minimum 5mm of grout cover for the prestressing steel. Spaces and
centralizers shall be used to satisfy the same requirements for grout
protected ground anchor tendons. The anchorage device of tendons
protected with fusion-bonded epoxy shall be electrically isolated from the
structure.
e. Unbonded Length
Page 94
The unbonded length of the tendon shall be a minimum of 4.5m or as
indicated on the Plans or approved working drawings.
A sheath completely filled with corrosion inhibiting grease or grout, or a

heat shrinkable tube internally coated with an elastic adhesive shall provide
corrosion protection.
If grease is used to fill the sheath, provisions shall be made to prevent it

from escaping at the ends. The grease shall completely coat the tendon
and fill the interstices between the wire strands. Continuity of corrosion
protection shall be provided at the transition from the bonded length to
unbonded length of the tendon.
If the sheath provided is not a smooth tube then a separate bond breaker
must be provided to prevent the tendon from bonding to the anchor grout
surrounding the unbonded length.
f. Anchorage and Trumpet
Nonrestressable anchorages may be used unless restressable anchorages

are not designated on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Bearing plates shall be sized so that the bending stresses in the plate do
not exceed the yield strength of the steel when a load equal to 95% of the
minimum guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the tendon is applied. The
size of bearing plates shall not be less than that shown on the Plans or on
the approved working drawings.
The trumpet shall be welded to the bearing plate. The trumpet shall have
an inside diameter at least 6mm greater than the diameter of the tendon at
the anchorage. The trumpet shall be long enough to accommodate
movements of the structure during testing and stressing. For strand
tendons with encapsulation over the unbonded length, the trumpet shall be
long enough to enable the tendon to make a transition from the diameter
of the tendon in the unbonded length to the diameter of tendon at the
anchor head without damaging the encapsulation.
Trumpet of restressable ground anchors shall be filled with corrosion-

inhibiting grease and shall have a permanent Buna-N synthetic rubber or
an approved equal seal between the trumpet and the unbonded length
corrosion protection.
Trumpet of non-restressable ground anchor shall be filled with grout and

shallow have tightly fitting temporary seal between the trumpet and the
unbonded length corrosion protection.
g. Tendon Storage and Handling
Page 95
Tendons shall be stored and handled in such a manner as to avoid damage
or corrosion. Damage to tendon’s prestressing steel as a result to
abrasions, cuts, nicks, welds, weld splatter corrosion or pitting will be a
cause for rejection by the Engineer. Grounding of welding leads to the
prestressing steel is not permitted. A slight rusting, provided it is not
sufficient to cause pits visible to the unaided eye, shall not be cause for
rejection. Prior to inserting a tendon into the drilled hole, its corrosion
protection elements shall be examined for damage. Any damage found
shall be repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer. Degrease the
bond length of tendons and remove solvent residue before installation.
B. Installation
The Contractor shall select the drilling method, the grouting procedure and
grouting pressure to be used for the installation of the ground anchor as necessary
to satisfy the load test requirements with prior approval of the Engineer.
a. Drilling
The drilling method used may be core drilling, rotary drilling, percussion
drilling, auger drilling or driven casting. The method of drilling used shall
prevent loss of ground above the drilled hole that may be detrimental to the
structure of existing structures. Casting for anchor holes, if used, shall be
removed, unless permitted by the Engineer to be left in place. The location,
inclination, and alignment of the drilled hole shall be as shown on the plans.
Inclination and alignment shall be within plus or minus 3 degrees of the
planned angle at the bearing plate, and within plus or minus 30cm of the
planned location at the ground surface (point of entry).
b. Tendon Insertion
The tendon shall be inserted into the drilled hole to the desired depth
without difficulty. When the tendon cannot be completely inserted it shall
be removed and the drill hole cleaned or redrilled to permit insertion.
Partially inserted tendons shall not be driven or forced into the hole. Do not
extend ground anchors beyond the right-of-way or easement limits.
c. Grouting
A neat cement grout or sand-cement grout conforming to the requirements

of Subsection 513.3.2 shall be used. Admixtures, if used, shall be mixed in
quantities not to exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The grouting equipment shall produce a grout free of lumps and

undispersed cement. A positive displacement grout pump shall be used.
The pump shall be equipped with a pressure gauge to monitor grout
pressures. The pressure gauge shall be capable of measuring pressures
of at least 1 MPa or twice the actual grout pressure to be used, whichever
is greater. The grout in equipment shall be sized to enable the grout to be
Page 96
pumped in one continuous operation. The mixer shall be capable of
continuously agitating the grout during placement.
The grout shall be injected from the lowest point of the drill hole. The grout
may be placed either before or after insertion of the tendon. The grout may
be pumped though grout tubes, casing, hollow-stem augers or drill rods.
The quantity of the grout and the grout pressures for each ground anchor
shall be recorded. The grout pressures and grout take shall be controlled
to prevent excessive heaving of the ground or fracturing of rock formations.
Except as indicated below, the grout above the top of the bond length may
be placed at the same time as the bond length grout, but it shall not be
placed under pressure. The grout at the top of the drill hole shall stop
150mm from the back of the structure or from the bottom of the trumpet,
whichever is lowest.
If the ground anchor is installed in a fine-grained soil using a drilled hole

larger than 150mm in diameter, then the grout above the top of the bond
length shall be placed after the ground anchor has been load tested. The
entire drill hole may be grouted at one time if it can be demonstrated that
the ground anchor system does not derive a significant portion of its
resistance from the soil above the bond length portion of the ground
anchor.
If grout protected tendons are used for ground anchors anchored in rock,
then pressure-grouting techniques shall be utilized. Pressure grouting
requires that the drill hole be sealed and that the grout be injected until a
0.35 MPa grout pressure can be maintained on the grout within the bond
length for a period of 5 minutes.
Upon completion of grouting, the grout tube may remain in the drill hole
provided it is filled with grout.
After grouting, the tendon shall not be loaded for a minimum of 3 days.
d. Trumpet and Anchorage
The corrosion protection surrounding the unbonded length of the tendon

shall extend into the trumpet a minimum of 150mm beyond the bottom seal
of the trumpet or 300mm into the trumpet if no trumpet seal is provided.
The corrosion protection surrounding the unbonded length of the tendon

shall not contact the bearing plate of the anchor head during load testing
and stressing.
The bearing plate and anchor head shall be placed perpendicular to the
axis of the tendon.
Page 97
The trumpet shall be completely filled with corrosion inhibiting grease or
grout. The grease may be placed any time during construction. The grout
shall be placed after the ground anchor has been load tested. The
Contractor shall demonstrate that the procedures selected for placement
of either grease or grout will produce a completely filled trumpet.
Anchorages not encased in concrete shall be covered with a corrosion

inhibiting grease-filled or grout-filled steel enclosure.
C. Testing and Stressing
The Contractor shall test each ground anchor using a maximum test load not to
exceed 80% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the tendon. No load
greater than 10% of the design load may be applied to the ground anchor prior to
load testing. The test load shall be simultaneously applied to the entire tendon.
a. Testing Equipment
A dial gauge or vernier scale capable of measuring displacements to

0.025mm shall be used to measure ground anchor movement. It shall have
adequate travel so total ground anchor movement can be measured
without resetting the device.
A hydraulic jack and pump shall be used to apply the test load. The jack
and a calibrated pressure gauge shall be used to measure the applied load.
The pressure gauge shall be graduated in 1 MPa increment or less. When
the theoretical elastic elongation of the total anchor length at the maximum
test load exceeds the ram travel of the jack, the procedure for recycling the
jack ram shall be included in the working drawings. Each increment of test
load shall be applied as possible.
A calibrated reference pressure gauge shall be available at the site. The

reference gauge shall be calibrated with the test jack and pressure gauge.
An electrical resistance load cell and readout shall be provided when

performing a creep test.
The stressing equipment shall be placed over the ground anchor tendon in
such a manner that the jack, bearing plates, load cells and stressing
anchorage are axially aligned with the tendon and the tendon is centered
within the equipment.
b. Performance Test
Five percent of the ground anchors or a minimum of three ground anchors,

whichever is greater shall be performance tested in accordance with the
following procedures. The Engineer shall select the ground anchors to be
performance tested. The remaining anchors shall be tested in accordance
with the proof test procedures.
Page 98
The performance test shall be made by incrementally loading and
unloading the ground anchor in accordance with the following schedule
unless a different maximum test load and schedule are indicated on the
Plans. The load shall be raised from one increment to another immediately
after recording the ground anchor movement. The ground anchor
movement shall be measured and recorded to the nearest 0.025mm with
respect to an independent fixed reference point at the alignment load and
at each increment of load. The load shall be monitored with a pressure
gauge. The reference pressure gauge during each performance test. If the
load is determined by the reference pressure gauge and the jack, pressure
gauge and reference pressure gauge shall be recalibrated. At load
increments other than the maximum test load, the load shall be held just
long enough to obtain the movement reading.
Performance Test Schedule

Load Load
(START) (CONTINUATION)
AL AL
0.25DL 0.25DL
AL 0.50DL
0.25DL 0.75DL
0.50DL 1.00DL
AL 1.20DL
0.25DL AL
0.50DL 0.25DL
0.75DL 0.50DL
AL 0.75DL
0.25DL 1.00DL
0.50DL 1.20DL
0.75DL 1.33DL
1.00DL (maximum test load)
Reduce to lock-off load
Where AL = Alignment load

DL = Design load for ground anchor
= Graph required
The maximum test load in a performance test shall be held for 10

minutes. The jack shall be repumped as necessary in order to
maintain a constant load. The load-hold period shall start as soon as
the maximum test load is applied and the ground anchor movement
shall be measured and recorded at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes.
If the ground anchor movement between 1 minute and 10 minutes
exceeds 1mm, the maximum shall be recorded at 15, 20, 25, 30, 45
and 60 minutes.
Page 99
A graph shall be reconstructed showing a plot of ground anchor
movement versus load for each load increment marked with an
asterisk (*) in the performance test schedule and a plot of residual
ground anchor movement of the tendon at each alignment load
versus the highest previously applied load. Graph format shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to use.
c. Proof Test
The proof test shall be performed by incrementally loading the

ground anchor in accordance with the following schedule unless a
different maximum test load and schedule are indicated on the Plan.
The load shall be raised by one increment to another immediately
after recording the ground anchor movement. The ground anchor
movement shall be measured and recorded to the nearest 0.025mm
with respect to an increment of load. The load shall be monitored
with a pressure gauge. At load increments other than the maximum
test load, the load shall be held just long enough to obtain the
movement reading.
Proof Test Schedule

Load Load
(START) (CONTINUATION)
AL
0.25DL 1.20DL
0.50DL 1.33DL (maximum test load)
0.75DL Reduce to lock-off load
1.00DL
Where: AL = Alignment load

The maximum test load in a proof test shall be held for 10 minutes.
The jack shall be repumped as necessary in order to maintain a
constant load. The load-hold period shall start as soon as the
maximum test load is applied and the ground anchor movement shall
be measured and recorded at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes. If the
ground anchor movement between 1 minute and 10 minutes
exceeds 1mm, the maximum test load shall be held for an additional
50 minutes. If the load hold is extended, the ground anchor
movement shall be recorded at 15, 20, 30, 45 and 60 minutes. A
graph shall be constructed showing a plot of ground anchor
movement versus load for each load increment in the proof test.
Graph format shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
Page 100
d. Creep Test
Creep tests shall be performed if required by the Plans or Special

Provisions. The Engineer shall select the ground anchors to be creep
tested.
The creep test shall be made by incrementally loading and unloading

the ground anchor in accordance with the performance test schedule
used. At the end of each loading cycle, the load shall be held
constant for the observation period indicated in the creep test
schedule below unless a different maximum test load is indicated in
the Plans. The times for reading and recording the ground anchor
movement during each observation period shall be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270
and 300 minutes as appropriate. Each load-hold period shall start as
soon as the test load is applied. In a creep test the pressure gauge
and reference pressure gauge will be used to measure the applied
load, and the load cell will be used to monitor small changes of load
during constant load-hold period. The jack shall be repumped as
necessary in order to maintain a constant load.
Creep Test Schedule

Load Observation Period
(Minutes)
AL
0.25DL 10
0.50DL 30
0.75DL 30
1.00DL 45
1.20DL 60
1.33DL 300
Where: AL = Alignment load

A graph shall be constructed showing a plot of the ground anchor

movement and the residual movement measure in a creep test as
described for the performance test. Also, a graph shall be
constructed showing a plot of the ground anchor creep movement
for each load-hold as a function of the logarithm of time. Graph
formats shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
e. Ground Anchor Load Test Acceptance Criteria
Page 101
A performance-tested of proof-tested ground anchor with a 10
minute load hold is acceptable if the:
e.1 Ground anchor resists the maximum t6est load with less
than 1mm movement between 1 and 10 minutes; and
e.2 Total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80%

of the theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length.
e.3 Total movement at the maximum test load may not exceed
the theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length plus
50% of the theoretical elastic elongation of the bonded length.
[Criterion (3) applies only for a performance-tested ground
anchor in competent rock.]
A performance-tested or proof-tested ground anchor with a 60

minute load hold is acceptable if the:
e.1 Ground anchor resist the maximum test load with a creep
rate that does not exceed 2 mm in the last log cycle of time.

the theoretical elastic elongation of the bonded length.
A creep-tested ground anchor is acceptable if the:
e.1 Ground anchor carries the maximum test load with a creep
rate that does not exceed 2 mm in the last log cycle of time.

the theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length plus
50% of theoretical elastic elongation of the bonded length.
Page 102
If the total movement of the ground anchor at the maximum test load
does not exceed 80% of the theoretical elastic elongation of the
unbonded length, the ground anchor shall be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
A ground anchor which has a creep rate greater than 2 mm per log
cycle of time can be incorporated into the structure at a design load
equal to one-half of its failure load. The failure load is the load
resisted by the ground anchor after the load has been allowed to
stabilize for 10 minutes.
When a ground anchor fails, the Contractor shall modify the design
and/or the installation procedures. These modifications may include,
but are not limited to, installing a replacement ground anchor,
reducing the design load by increasing the number of ground
anchors, modifying the installation methods, increasing the bond
length of changing the ground anchor type. Any modification which
requires changes to the structure shall be approved by the Engineer.
Any modifications of design or construction procedures shall be
without additional cost to the Department and without extension of
contract time.
Retesting of a ground anchor will not be permitted, except that

regrouted ground anchors may be retested.
Complete record of the load testing data during the conduct of

Performance Test, Proof Test and Creep Test must be duly signed
by the Contractor and his Engineer and submitted to the Engineer
for evaluation prior to recommendation for payment. However, if in
the evaluation, a discrepancy in the computation revealed which may
affect the ground anchoring, rectification of the anchorage shall be
done at Contractor’s own expense.
f. Lock Off
Upon successful completion of the load testing, the ground anchor

load shall be reduced to the lock-off load indicated on the Plans and
transferred to the anchorage device. The ground anchor may be
completely unloaded prior to lock-off. After transferring the load and
prior to removing the jack, a lift-off load reading shall be made. The
lift-off load shall be within 10% of the specified lock-off load. If the
load is not within 10% of the specified lock-off load, the anchorage
shall be reset and another lift-off load reading shall be made. This
process shall be repeated until the desired lock-off load is obtained.
Page 103
Ground anchors will be measured and paid for by the sum of the bonded and
unbonded length of anchor bars installed and accepted as shown on the Plans or
ordered by the Engineer. No change in the number of ground anchors to be paid
for will be made because of the use by the Contractor of an alternative number of
ground anchors
.
6. Basis of Payment
The accepted quantity , measured as prescribed in Section 513.5, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price paid for Permanent Ground Anchors, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labors, materials, tools,
equipment and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in installing the
ground anchors (including testing), complete in place, as shown on the plans and
as specified in these Specifications and the Special Provisions, and as directed by
the Engineer.
Pay Item Unit of Measurement

Number Description
513 (1) Permanent Ground Linear meter

Anchor (Soil Nail)
ITEM 715 GEOTEXTILES
715(1) Geotextile
Drainage Outfall
1. Description
This Item covers geotextile fabrics for use in subsurface drainage, hydraulic filter,
erosion control, sediment control, pavement structures as a waterproofing and stress
relieving membrane, and as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of dissimilar
materials such as foundations and select fill materials.
2. Physical and Chemical Requirements
Fibers used in the manufacture of geotextiles, and the threads used in joining
geotextiles by sewing, shall consist of long-chain synthetic polymers, composed of at
least 85 percent by mass polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides. They shall be formed
into a network such that the filaments or yarns retain dimensional stability relative to
each other, including selvedges. These materials shall conform to the physical
Page 104
requirements of Table 1 for the indicated application. Guidelines for the survivability
levels referred to under “Separation” in Table 1 are included in Table 2.
3. Sampling and Testing
The product shall be subject to sampling and testing. Sampling shall be done in
accordance with ASTM D 4354 and testing procedures shall be in accordance with
the methods given in Table 1.
4. Certification
A. Manufacturer's Certificate
The manufacturer shall file with the purchaser a certificate stating the name of
the manufacturer, the chemical composition of the filaments or yarns, and
other pertinent information so as to fully describe the geotextile. The
manufacturer shall include in the certificate a guarantee stating that the
geotextile that is furnished meets the requirements of the specification. The
certificate shall be attested to by a person having legal authority to bind the
company. Either mismarking or misrepresentation by the manufacturer shall
be reason to discontinue acceptance under these specifications. Notice sent
to the manufacturer by the purchaser regarding the discontinuance of
acceptance will be considered to be notice to all wholesalers, jobbers,
distributors, agents and other intermediaries handling themanufacturer’s
product.
5. Quality Control
The geotextile manufacturer is responsible for establishing and maintaining a quality

control program so as to assure compliance with the requirements of this specification.
6. Shipment and Storage
A. During periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall be protected from
direct sunlight, ultra-violet rays, temperatures greater than 600C (1400F), mud,
dust, and debris. To the extent possible, the fabric shall be maintained
wrapped in a heavy-duty protective covering. Each shipping document shall
include a notation certifying that the geotextile is in accordance with the
manufacturer’s certificate and guarantee previously filed with the purchaser.
B. Product Marking
Label the fabric and its container with the manufacturer’s name fabric type or
trade name, lot number and quantity.
7. Installation
A. Separation Geotextile
Page 105
The geotextile shall be unrolled as smoothly as possible on the prepared
subgrade in the direction of construction traffic. Adjacent geotextile rolls shall
be overlapped in the direction of subbase placement using the guidelines in
Table 3. Sewing is recommended where subgrade soils have a CBR value less
than 1. The geotextile maybe held in place prior to subbase placement by pins,
staples, or piles of fill or rock. On curves, the geotextile maybe folded or cut to
conform to the curve. The fold or overlap shall be in the direction of construction
and held in place as prescribed above.
B. Drainage Geotextile
In trenches, after placing the backfill material, the geotextile shall be folded
over the top of the filter material to produce a minimum overlap of 12 inches
for trenches greater than 12 inches wide. In trenches less than 12 inches in
width, the overlap shall be equal to the width of the trench. The geotextile shall
then be covered with the subsequent course. Successive sheets of geotextile
shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches in the direction of flow.
C. Erosion Control Geotextile
The geotextile shall be placed and anchored on a smooth graded surface

approved by the Engineer. The geotextile shall be placed in such a manner
that placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or tear the
fabric. Anchoring of the terminal ends of the geotextile shall be accomplished
through the use of key trenches or aprons at the crest and toe of slope. In
certain applications to expedite construction, 18 inches long anchoring pins
placed on 2 to 6 feet centers depending on the slope of the covered area have
been used successfully.
D. Paving Fabric
The fabric shall be placed into the asphalt sealant with minimum wrinkling prior
to the time the asphalt has cooled and lost tackiness. As directed by the
Engineer, wrinklers or folds in excess of 1 inch shall be slit and laid flat.
Brooming and/or pneumatic rolling will be required to maximize fabric contact
with the pavement surface. Overlap of fabric joints shall be sufficient to ensure
full closure of the joint, but should not exceed 6 inches. Transverse joints shall
be lapped in the direction of paving to prevent edge pickup by the paver. A
second application of asphalt sealant to fabric overlaps will be required if in the
judgment of the Engineer additional asphalt sealant is needed to ensure proper
bonding of the double fabric layer.
E. Geotextile Silt Fence
Fence construction shall be adequate to handle stress from sediment loading.

Geotextile at the bottom of the fence shall be buried a minimum of 6 inches in
a trench so that no flow can pass under the barrier. The trench shall be
backfilled and the soil compacted over the geotextile. Fence height shall be as
specified by the Engineer but in no case shall exceed 36 inches above ground
Page 106
surface. The geotextile shall be spliced together only at a support post with a
minimum 6 inches overlap.
F. Hydraulic Filter
The geotextile shall be laid lengthwise down slopes and appropriately

anchored along the top edge. Installation horizontally along slopes will not be
accepted. Overlaps shall be sufficient to prevent parting of laps during the
initial construction or fill stage. On soft soil subgrades the overlap shall not be
less than 400 mm. Alternatively, the geotextile shall be sawn using a double-
stitch portable sewing machine and appropriate thread.
A. The geotextile shall be measured by the number of square meters from the
pavement lines shown on the plans, or from the pavement lines established in
writing by the Engineer.
B. Temporary silt fence will be measured in linearmeter.
C. Removed sediment will be measured by the cubicmeter.
D. Excavation, backfill, bedding, and cover material are separate pay items.
Table 2 Construction Survivability Levels
Site Soil CBR Installation <1 1-2 >2
Equipment Ground Contract

>345 <345 >345 <345 >345 >345
Pressure (KPa)
Cover Thickness (mm)1 ,

(Compacted)
1022,3
152 NR NR H H M M
305 NR NR H M M M
457 NR H M M M M
H = High
M = Medium
NR = Not Recommended
Page 107
1 Maximum aggregate size not to exceed one-half the compacted cover thickness
2 For low volume unpaved road (ADT<200vehicles)
3 The 102 mm minimum cover is limited to existing road bases intended for use in new
construction
Table 3 Recommended Overlaps
Soil Strength (CBR) Unsewn Overlap (mm) Overlap (mm)
Less than 1 - 229
1-2 956 203
2-3 762 76
3 and above 610 -
9. Basis of Payment
The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the contract price per
unit of measurement, respectively, for each pay item listed below.
Payment shall be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Separation Geotextile Square Meter
Drainage Geotextile Square Meter
Paving Fabric Square Meter
Hydraulic Filter Square Meter
Silt Fence Linear Meter
Remaining Sediment Cubic Meter
Page 108
PART H. MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
ITEM 600 CURB AND GUTTER
600(4) Concrete Curb and Gutter, Type A (Cast in place)
1.Description
This work item shall consist of the construction of curb and/or gutter made of concrete in
accordance with this specification at the location, and in conformity with the lines, grades,
dimensions and design, shown on the plans or as required by the Engineer.
2.Materials Requirements
Bed course material as shown on the plans shall consist of cinders, sand, slag, gravel,
crushed stone, or other approved porous material.
Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the plans and shall conform to the requirements
of Division 03.
Expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M153.
3.Construction Requirements
Excavation shall be made to the required depth and the base upon which the curb and/or
gutter is to be set shall be compacted to a firm and even surface. Bed course material shall
be placed and compacted to form a bed of the required thickness as shown on the plans. All
soft and unsuitable materials shall be removed or replaced with suitable materials.
Forms shall be of wood or metal as approved by the Engineer. Forms to hold the concrete
shall be built and set-in place. Forms for at least 50m of curb and/or gutter shall be in place
and checked for alignment and grade before concrete is placed. Curbs and/or gutters
constructed on curves shall have forms of either wood or metal and they shall be accurately
shaped to the curvature shown on the plans.
Mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Division
03, Concrete.
The concrete shall be placed in the forms in layers of 100 or 125mm each, and to the depth
required. It shall be tamped and spaded until mortar entirely covers the top and surfaces of
the forms. The top of the concrete shall be finished to a smooth and even surface and the
edges to a radius shown on the plans.
The curb and/or gutter shall be constructed in uniform sections of not more than 50m in length
except where shorter sections are required to coincide with the location of the weakened
planes or contraction joints of the concrete pavement, or for closures, but no section shall be
less than 2m long. The section shall be separated by sheet templates set perpendicular to
the face and top of the curb and/or gutter and not less than 50mm deeper than the depth of
the curb and/or gutter. The templates shall be approximately 5mm in thickness and of the
same width as that of the curb and/or gutter. Templates shall be set carefully and held firmly
Page 109
during the placing of the concrete and shall remain in place until the concrete has set
sufficiently to hold its shape but shall be removed while the forms are still in place. Preformed
joint filler approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of the sheet template mentioned
above. In this event the fiber board shall be pre-cut to the shape of the curb so that its outer
edge will be flushed with the abutting curb and/or gutter.
Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals shown on the plans. Where a curb is placed
next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in the curb shall be located opposite expansion
joints in the pavement.
The form shall be removed within 24 hours after the concrete has been placed. Minor defects
shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland Cement and two parts of fine
aggregate. The exposed surface shall be finished while the concrete is still fresh. The
concrete shall be suitably protected from the weather until thoroughly hardened.
After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces on the back of the curb which were
excavated for placing the curb shall be refilled to the required elevation with suitable material
which shall be tamped in layers of not more than 150mm until consolidated.
ITEM 601 SIDEWALK
601(a) Sidewalk (100mm thk.)
1.General
This work item shall consist of the construction of Portland cement concrete sidewalk in
accordance with this specification and to the lines, grades, levels and dimensions shown on
the plans, or as required by the Engineer.
2.Materials Requirements
The Portland cement concrete shall be Class A as specified and shown on the plans. Unless
otherwise ordered, the preformed joint filler shall have a thickness of 5mm and shall conform
to the requirements of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. Forms shall be of wood or
metal as approved by the Engineer and shall extend to the full depth of the concrete. All
forms shall be straight, free from warps and of adequate strength t resist distortion. The bed
course material shall consist of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or other approved
permeable granular materials of such grading that all particles shall pass 12.5mm (1/2 inch)
sieve as shown on the plans.
3.Construction Requirements
Excavation shall be made to the depth and width required that would permit the installation
and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be shaped and compacted to a firm and even
surface conforming to the section shown on the plans and subbase course materials shall be
placed in accordance with the specifications for Aggregate Subbase Course.
All forms shall be staked securely in position at the correct line and level. Preformed joint
filler shall be set in position shown on the plans before placing the concrete is started.
Page 110
The mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall be as specified in Division 03,
Concrete. The cement concrete shall be placed to the total depth shown on the plans.
The surface shall be cut through to a depth of 10mm with a trowel at intervals of 1m or, where
required, in straight lines perpendicular to the edge of the sidewalk. The surface shall then
be brushed and the edges and the transverse cuts shaped with a suitable tool so formed as
to round the edges.
ITEM 604 FENCING
603(3)a Metal Guardrails (Metal Beam) including Concrete Post
1. Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and guardrails of the types
called for in the contract and in accordance with this Specification, at the locations, and in
conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
2. Material Requirement
Materials for the desired type of guardrail shall meet the requirements specified in the
following specifications:
a. Wire rope or wire cable AASHTO M 30

b. Chain link fabric AASHTO M 181
c. Metal beam rail AASHTO M 180
d. Timber rail, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans or Special Provisions, any
of the following first group of Philippine Timber shall be used: Ipil, Molave, Tindalo
or Yacal. Only one specie of timber shall be used in the construction of any one
continuous length of guardrail.
Timber guardrail shall be well-seasoned, straight and free of injurious defects. They shall
be dressed and of sufficient length so that joints shall be on the rail posts.
Guardrail Hardware. Offset brackets of the resilient and non-resilient types shall be of the
type specified, or as shown on the Plans, and shall meet the strength requirements
specified.
Splices and end connections shall be of the type and design specified or as shown on the
Plans, and shall be such strength as to develop the full design strength of the rail elements.
Unless otherwise specified, al fittings, bolts, washers and other accessories shall be
galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111 or ASTM A 153,
whichever may apply. All galvanizing shall be done after fabrication.
Guardrail Post. Post shall be of either wood, steel, or concrete, as may be specified. Only
one kind of post shall be used for any one continuous guardrail.
Page 111
Wood post shall be fabricated from an approved or specified timber specie and shall be
of the quality, diameter or section and length as specified, or as shown on the Plans.
Steel post shall be of the section and length as specified, or as shown on the Plans. They
shall be of a copper bearing steel when so specified. steel shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. The posts shall be galvanized or
shop painted as may be specified.
Pre-cast reinforced concrete posts shall be of a section and length as specified or as

shown on the Plans. Concrete, for class specified. Reinforcement shall conform with the
requirements of AASHTO M 31 Grade 60. All bars shall be of the deformed type.
Concrete deadmen for end anchorages shall be as specified, or as shown on the Plans.
Concrete and reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as stated above the precast
reinforced concrete posts.
Paints for steel and wood shall be specified and conform to the requirements specified in
Paint.
A. Posts
Posts shall be set vertically in the position shown in the plans and where embedded
in a concrete foundation block, shall remain undisturbed for a minimum of 48
hours. The space around the post shall be backfilled to the ground line with
approved material in layers not exceeding 100 mm and each layer shall be
moistened and thoroughly compacted.
B. Rail Elements
Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth continuous

installation. All bolts, except adjustment bolts, shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be
of sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts at least 5 mm but not more than 10
mm.
Where painting of railing components is specified, any damage to the shop coat of
paint shall be corrected by an application of an approved rust-inhibitive primer prior
to further painting. Any surface inaccessible to painting after erection shall be given
the specified number of coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough brushing using
an approved pressure spray.
Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base material is
exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall
be protected in a manner as may be specified or directed.
The surfaces and sawed edges of untreated or salt-treated guardrail shall be

painted with three coats of white paint to within 200 mm of the ground line. The
first 200 mm of posts above the ground shall be painted with two coats of black
Page 112
pain. Painting shall be done only when the timber is dry and clean. Each coat of
paint shall be thoroughly dry before the next coat is applied. Paint shall be applied
in heavy coats, completely covering every part of the surface and shall be worked
well into the joints and open spaces. It shall be thoroughly and evenly spread that
no excess paint collects at any point.
Guardrail and posts, after erection has been completed, shall be stained with two
applications of approved creosote stain, covering the rails and the exposed
portions of the posts. The wood shall be dry before being stained. The first coat
shall be thoroughly dry before the second is applied. Stain shall to be applied
during damp weather.
For beam type guardrails, metal works not galvanized shall be given one shop coat
of red lead, zinc chromate paint or an approved fast-drying rust-inhibitive primer
and two field coats of white or aluminum paint. Untreated wood posts shall be given
three coats of paints of the color indicated of the Plans, or as specified. Painting
shall conform to the requirements of Paint.
Guardrail shall be measured by linear meter from center to center of end posts, except
where end connections are made on masonry or steel structures, in which case
measurement will be to the face of such structures.
End anchorages and terminal sections will be measured as units of each kind shown in
Bid Schedule. If no pay item for anchorages or terminal sections appear in the Bid
Schedule, measurement therefore shall be included in the linear meter measurement for
completed guardrail.
5. Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities of guardrail, determined in Item 4, Method of Measurement, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for the type specified, complete in
place, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
item. When so specified, end anchorages and terminal sections will be paid for at the
contract unit price for each of the kind specified and completed in place.
Payment Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
603 (1) Guardrail (Wire rope or Linear meter

wire cable)
603 (2) Cable Guardrail (Chain Linear meter
Link Fabric)
603 (3a) Metal Guardrail (Metal Linear meter
Beam Including Post)
603 (3b) Metal Beam End Piece Each
Page 113
603 (4) Guardrail (Timber) Linear meter
604 Fencing (CHB)

604(3) Fencing (Posts)
604(4) Fencing (Gates)
1. Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and barbed wire or chain link
fences in accordance with the details, and at the locations, shown on the Plans, or as
required by the Engineer.
A. Barbed Wire
Barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121, Class I. The barbed
wire shall consist of 2 strands of 12.5 gauge wire, twisted with 2 points 14 gauge
barbs spaced 100 mm apart.
B. Chain Link Fence Fabric
Chain link fence fabric shall be fabricated from 10 gauge galvanized wire
conforming to AASHTO M 181 and shall be of the type shown on the Plans. Before
ordering the chain link fence fabric, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the
material to the Engineer for testing and for approval.
C. Concrete Post
Concrete posts shall be made of Class A concrete in accordance with Item 405,
Structural Concrete. The posts shall be cast to a tapered section 3 m long, or to
the length shown on the detailed Plans, and shall have a smooth surface finish.
D. Steel Post
Steel posts shall be of the sections and length as specified or as shown on the
Plans. The posts shall be copper bearing steel and shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the gradespecified.
E. Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement for concrete posts shall be deformed steel bars conforming to
the provisions of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel.
F. Hardware
Nuts, bolts, washers and other associated hardware shall be galvanized after
fabrication as specified as ASTM 153.
Page 114
The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be necessary to construct
the fence to the required grade and alignment.
Fence shall generally follow the contour of the ground. Grading shall be performed where
necessary to provide a neat appearance.
Gates shall be constructed as shown on the Plans.
A. Erection Post
The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation
block prior to the placing of concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing
to prevent movement of the post during the placing and setting of the concrete.
The posts shall be erected to the height and location shown on the Plans, or as
ordered by the Engineer.
B. Installation of Chain Link Fence fabric
The chain link fence fabric shall be set to line and elevation and pulled taut between
each post before spot welding, or other method of fixing, is carried out. Where
splicing of the fence fabric is necessary, or at joints, the lapping of the chain link
fence fabric shall be for a minimum of 100 mm and shall occur only at the post. No
horizontal splicing will be permitted. The fence fabric shall be fixed to the posts as
shown on the Plans. Any surface protective layer damaged during welding and/or
construction shall be restored properly.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meter measured center to center
of posts, of fencing erected in place and accepted.
5. Basis of Payment
The quantity, as determined in Subsection 604.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid

for at the contract price per unit of measurement respectively for each of the particular
items listed below and as shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be
full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
604 (1) Fencing (Barbed wire) Linear Meter
Page 115
Fencing (Chain LinkFence
604 (2) Fabric) Linear Meter
604 (3) Fencing (Posts) Each
604 (4) Fencing (Gates) Each
604(8) Watch Tower (Perimeter Guard Post)
EARTHWORK
1. General
A. Description
The specification covers general requirements for the building works of excavation
and backfilling for this project.
a. Scope
Excavating, filling, and sub-grade preparation in connection with the

construction of foundations and underground facilities for building.
The work includes but is not necessarily limited to:
a.1 Surveying
a.2 Site Clearing
a.3 Protecting existing facilities
a.4 Excavating for footings and foundations
a.5 Filling and backfilling to formation levels
a.6 Preparation of sub-grade in building areas
a.7 Earthworks generally
a.8 Quality control
b. Surveying
All surveying required for the works shall be performed by the contractor.
The elevations and distances shall be measured from the Owner’s
approved existing benchmarks.
All the surveying methods and records shall be submitted to the Project
Manager for approval.
Page 116
c. Site Clearing
The entire site as indicated on the drawings shall be cleared and the
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions in its execution.
d. Protection of Existing Facilities
All the existing facilities in the vicinity of the works shall be protected from
damage. Existing lighting poles, foundations of adjacent buildings, street
paving, curbs and gutter, sidewalk and drainage, etc., shall be protected as
required in a manner as approved by the Project manager.
Existing facilities such as paving, lighting poles, etc., if temporarily

relocated, damaged or removed shall be re-installed by the Contractor.
B. Quality Assurance
a. Codes and Standards
a.1 Applicable Standards
Comply with standards as specified in this specification.
a.2 Particular Standards
Unless otherwise specified or shown the following codes and

standard of the latest issue shall apply:
ASTM D 1196 Standard Test Method for Non - repetitive

Static Plate Load Test of Soils and Flexible
Pavement Components.
ASTM D1556 Standard Test for Density of Soil in Place by

the “Standard Cone Method”.
ASTM D1557 Standard Test for Moisture Density Relation

of Soil and Aggregate Mixtures using 10lbs
Rammer and 18” Drop.
ASTM D422 Method of Particle - Size Analysis of Soils.
2. Products
A. Fill Material - General
a. Approval
All fill material shall be subject for approval by the Project Manager.
b. Notification
Page 117
For approval of fill material, notify the Project Manager at least two weeks
in advance of the intention to import fill material. Take samples and test as
necessary for the purpose of verifying the quality of the material for the
acceptance of the Project Manager.
B. Imported Fill Material
Imported excavated for use as fill shall be obtained from borrow pits to be located
and secure by the Contractor. All borrow material shall be free from stumps, tree
roots and deleterious substances.
C. Trench and Structural Backfill
a. Imported Cohesion less Fill Material
Imported cohesion less material used for trench and structural backfill shall
be free from organic substance, debris, rocks or lumps and other
deleterious matter, shall be subject for approval by the Project Manager,
and shall be particle size grading within the following limits.
a.1 Passing the number four sieve: 100 %
a.2 Passing the number 200 sieve: 8 % max.
b. Excavated Material
b.1 Material excavated from the site, except for deleterious material,
shall be used for back filling subject to the Project Manager’s
inspection and approval.
b.2 Excavated material, which is approved by the Project Manager

for backfill, shall be stockpiled at a location adjacent to the
construction site as directed.
D. Other Materials
The Contractor subject for approval by the Project Manager shall select all other
materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation
3. Execution
A. General
a. Familiarization
Prior to all work of this Specification the Contractor should become familiar
with the site, site conditions, the sub - soil conditions, and all portions of the
work falling within this specification.
Page 118
b. Temporary access and drainage
If the work site is inaccessible due to soft soil or obstructions, the Contractor
should provide the necessary means of access at his own expense.
Effective temporary drainage should be designated to keep the work area
from flooding.
c. Prior to backfilling
c.1 Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to

be covered up or enclosed by works of this specification prior to all
required inspection and approvals.
c.2 Should any of the works be so enclosed or covered up before it

has been approved, uncover all the work at no additional cost to the
Owner.
c.3 Prior to backfilling, all backfill material shall be inspected by the

Project Manager.
B. Excavating
a. Excavation to Levels
a.1 All excavation shall be made to lines and elevation as shown on

the design drawings. Where excavated levels are not shown on the
drawings, excavate as required to accommodate the installation.
Do not disturb adjacent foundation bottoms.
a.2 Tolerance for excavation shall be kept to a minimum of 50 mm

over excavation and zero mm under excavation.
a.3 When unsuitable soil is encountered at the specified excavation

level, the Contractor must report the condition to the Project
Manager and obtain directions for corrective action before
proceeding.
b. Excavated Faces
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for maintaining the stability
of all excavated faces until final acceptance of the foundation works.
c. Over Excavation
c.1 Backfill and compact all over excavated areas as specified for
ill below at no additional cost to the Owner.
c.2 Over excavation adjacent to existing foundation shall be

avoided. If over excavation is necessary, proper support and the
Page 119
Contractor as approved by the Project Manager shall provide
protection to existing structures and facilities.
d. Removal of Surplus Soil
Surplus soil and rejected or disapproved excavated material such as clay

or boulders shall be removed from the jobsite as directed by the Project
Manager in such a manner that other work may not be interrupted
Furthermore, excavated materials to be re-used shall be immediately
transported and stockpiled at a location adjacent to the construction site as
directed by the Project Manager. No surplus excavated material shall be
removed off site without the permission of the Project Manager.
e. Soft Spots
Where unexpected soft deposits are encountered during the course of

excavation for foundations, they shall be removed to the extent as directed
by the Project Manager and shall be filled to the design lines with approved
materials.
C. Preparation of Subgrade
a. Scarifying
Cut or fill existing subgrade in under floor areas of building to required

formation levels, scarify the exposed surface to a minimum depth of 150
mm, thoroughly moisture - condition, and re-compact to the requirement of
fill below.
b. Leveling
Remove all hummocks and other uneven surfaces of subgrade prior to

placement of fill.
D. Excess Water Control
a. Unfavorable Weather
Do not place, spread or roll and fill material during unfavorable weather
conditions. Do not resume operations until moisture content and fill density
are satisfactory to the Project Manager.
b. Flooding
Provide temporary drainage to prevent flooding of sub grade. Promptly

remove all water collected in depressions.
c. Softened Sub grade
Page 120
Where the soil has been softened or eroded by flooding or placement
during unfavorable weather, remove all damaged areas and re-compact as
specified for fill and compaction below.
d. De - Watering
d.1 Provide and maintain at all times during construction ample

means and devices with which to remove promptly and dispose of
all water from every source entering the excavations or other parts
of the work.
d.2 Flooded excavation shall be de - watered including forming

temporary sumps, all residual silt and muck is to be removed before
proceeding with the work.
d.3 De-water by means, which will ensure dry excavations and the
preservation of the final lines, faces, and grades of bottom of
excavations.
d.4 If ground water or spring is encountered, the Contractor shall

pump excavations free of water prior, during, and for a sufficient
period after placing foundations.
E. Filling and compaction
a. Filling
After sub grade and bottoms of foundations and trenches have been
prepared and approved by the Project Manager, spread approved fill
material in layers not exceeding 300 mm in un-compacted thickness.
b. Moisture - Conditioning
Water the fill material as necessary and thoroughly mix to obtain as near
as possible optimum water content which will permit proper handling.
c. Compaction: General
c.1 Compact each layer of fill to at least the specified minimum

degree around the foundations. Repeat compaction process until
the required level is obtained.
c.2 The bottom of all excavations shall be finished as the required

level.
d. Degree of Compaction Requirements.
Under Floor Slab
Page 121
Sub grade under floor slabs shall be compacted to a dry density equivalent
to 95% (min).
e. Quality Control
e.1 Backfilling shall be carried out at a time as agreed with the

Project Manager
e.2 The type of compaction equipment to be used by the Contractor

shall require prior approval by the Project Manager.
e.3 Compaction shall comply with the following:
e.3.1 Soil compaction test frequency as required by the

Project Manager.
e.3.2 Loose fill thickness - 300mm max.
e.3.3 Plate compaction test:
(i) Frequency of plate load test for backfilling shall be

one test every 50m x 50m (m2) on the finished
surface.
(ii) Loose Fill Thickness30cm max.
(iii) ‘K’ value of 30 cm dia. bearing plate 5kg/cm3 min

general fill.
7kg. /cm3 min.for structural fill.
Priority of the quality control method for compaction is the plate

load test. If it is better to use Field density test instead of the
plate load test after making comparison table of the plate load
test and field density test with the Project Manager’s approval,
the Contractor can proceed the quality control with the field
density test.
The work procedure for excavation and backfilling works must

be submitted to the Project Manager for approval.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. General
A. Description
a. Scope
In accordance with the provisions of this section and the drawings, provide:
Page 122
a.1 Cast-in-place concrete, complete, in place, and properly
installed.
a.2 All steel, complete, and in place, required for reinforcement of

cast-in-place concrete.
a.3 Formwork for all cast-in-place concrete.
a. Codes and Standards
a.1 Applicable Standards
Comply with standards specified in this specification.
a.2 Particular Standards
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
ACI American Concrete Institute
b. Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be free from defect, corrosion, or other deleterious

coatings.
c. Design of Formwork
Design of formwork is the contractor’s full responsibility.
d. Qualification of Installers
d.1 Throughout the progress of installation of the work of this

section, provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the specified requirements, completely trained and
experienced in the necessary skills, and who shall be present at the
site and shall direct all work performed under this section.
d.2 In actual installation of the work of this section, use adequate

numbers of skilled workmen to ensure installation in strict
accordance with the approved design.
d.3 In acceptance or rejection of work performed under this section,

the Owner will make no allowance for lack of skill on the part of
workmen.
d.3.1 Verification of Site Condition
Page 123
The contractor, before commencing any work, shall verify
the grade conditions of all ground surfaces and any other
conditions at the site and other areas which may affect his
work and shall notify the Project Manager in writing of any
discrepancies between conditions as actually existing and
as shown on the design drawings.
d.3.2 Quality Control
d.3.2.1 Testing Arrangements
Prior to all work under this section, make all

necessary arrangements with the testing laboratory
regarding timely implementation of testing
procedures and quality control for concrete and
concrete related materials.
d.3.2.2 Trial Mixes and Strength Tests
d.3.2.2.1 At least four weeks prior to

commencement of concrete placing, trial
mixes shall be made for each class of
concrete.
d.3.2.2.2 The contractor shall submit a

detailed execution plan for the trial mixes for
approval by the Project Manager before
commencing the work.
d.3.2.2.3 Samples for strength tests of each

class of concrete placed each day shall be
taken not less than once a day nor less than
once for each volume stated below.
Total Concrete Volume No. of Samples to be

(cubic meters) per day taken
0 - 50 One sample
51 - 200 One for each 75 CM
201 - 400 One for each 100 CM
401 or overOne for each 150 CM
(i) Changes in Materials and Mix Proportions
Neither the mix proportions nor the source of

material supply to the jobsite shall be altered.
However, adjustments can be made in the
Page 124
proportions of the mix as required to take
account of permitted variations in the
materials. In this case, trial mixes and
strength tests shall be carried out.
(ii) Failure to Meet Requirements
If the 28-day test results are found to be

below the specified strength, cylindrical core
specimens shall be cut from the hardened
concrete at appropriate locations. Where the
strength of the specimens is less than the
specified strength at 28 days, the concrete
structure or part of it shall be removed and
replaced.
(iii) Records
Records shall be kept of the positions in the

works of all batches of concrete, of their
grade and of all tests or other specimens
taken from them.
C. Submittals
a. Product Data
Submit the following within 30 days after award of the contract.
a.1 Complete material list of all items proposed to be furnished and

installed under this section.
a.2 Sufficient data to demonstrate compliance with the specified

requirements.
a.3 Complete information on cement source of supply, physical and

chemical characteristics, transportation, and intermediate
terminating procedures for mill-to-site handling, and site storage
procedures.
a.4 Complete information on aggregate procurement, processing

and storage.
a.5 Complete information on proposed batching and mixing

equipment and procedures, including water chilling or other devices
or systems to reduce mix temperatures.
a.6 Complete information on concrete handling equipment

proposed to be used, including capacities for chutes, pumps,
buckets, and all other equipment.
Page 125
a.7 Complete information on proposed consolidation equipment.
a.8 Complete description of proposed curing methods.
a.9 Steel producers’ certificates of mill analysis, plus tensile and

bend tests for reinforcing steel.
a.10 Manufacturers data and installation instructions for proprietary

formwork materials including form coatings, ties and accessories, a
manufactured form system if used.
b. Samples
Submit to the Project Manager samples of the following:
b.1 Concrete constituents, including admixtures.
b.2 Formwork ties and spreaders.
b.3 Formwork release agent
b.4 Remolded joint filler
b.5 Vapor barriers
b.6 Waterstops
b.7 Wedge inserts, and;
b.8 Expansion bolts
D. Product Handling
a. Protection
Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section before,
during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all
other trades.
b. Delivery
Deliver reinforcement to the jobsite bundled, tagged, and marked. Use

metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding
to markings shown on placement diagrams.
c. Storage
c.1 Cement
Page 126
All cement shall be delivered in sound and properly secured bags
and shall be stored in a dry weatherproof shed with a raised wooden
floor, or other facilities approved by the Project manager.
Each consignment shall be kept separate and distinct, and shall be

used in the sequence in which it is delivered to the site. Any cement
that has become seriously affected by damp or other causes shall
be removed from the site immediately.
c.2 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be stored so that intermixing of different grading

shall not occur. Stockpile aggregates in a manner that will prevent
contamination from the ground with undesirable material.
c.3 Reinforcement
Store reinforcement at the job site in a manner as to prevent

damage and accumulation of dirt and rust.
d. Replacements
In the event of damage to materials of this section, immediately make all

repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Project
manager.
e. Rejection
Any consignment or part of a consignment that does not comply with the
specification shall not be used in the work and shall be removed from the
site.
2. Products
A. Materials
a. Cement
a.1 Portland Cement
Portland Cement shall conform to Type 1 or equivalent and shall be

applied to all concrete grades. Different brands of cement shall not
be mixed. Preferably, use only one brand of cement for the entire
work.
a.2 Certificate
The manufacturer’s complying with the above specification shall

certify cement and a copy of the manufacturers test certificates shall
accompany each consignment.
Page 127
b. Aggregates
b.1 General
For the concrete of this section, all fine and coarse aggregate shall
preferably come from only one source.
b.2 Testing
Certified copies of satisfactory tests by a testing laboratory

approved by the Project Manager shall be accepted for aggregate
quality requirements.
c. Water
Water for mixing concrete shall be fresh and clean, and free from injurious
amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salt, or organic materials.
d. Admixtures
Admixtures shall be subject to prior approval of the Project Manager, if they

are to be used.
e. Curing Materials
e.1 Liquid Curing
Liquid curing and sealing compound shall be clear or translucent

without dye.
e.2 Sheet Materials
Sheet materials in sheet form used for covering the surfaces of

concrete to inhibit moisture loss during the curing period like curing
paper, polyethylene film, and white burlap polyethylene sheet.
e.3 Burlap cloth
For moist curing burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf and weighing
approximately 305 grams per sq. m. and shall be used in two layers.
f. Other Concreting Materials
f.1 Pre-formed Expansion Joint
Expansion joint filler material shall be bituminous fiber type.
f.2 Waterstops
Page 128
Water stops shall be extruded from new stock polyvinyl chloride,
ribbed, expandable center bulb, or other approved type. The
minimum width shall be 150 mm and minimum thickness shall be
6.4 mm.
f.3 Vapor Barriers
Vapor barriers shall be polyethylene sheets having a thickness of

0.2 mm minimum.
g. Batching, Mixing, and Delivery of Concrete
Use transit-mixed concrete from the approved batching and mixing plant.
h. Reinforcement
h.1 Reinforcing Bars
Reinforcing bars shall be deformed bars of grade 60 steel and shall

conform to ASTM A-706.
h.2 Steel Wire
Double strands Ga. 16 tie wires for fixing and tying reinforcements.
For big diameter bars, use Ga. 14.
h.3 Supports for Reinforcements
Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices of or spacing,

supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place.
h.3.1 Use wire bar type supports, unless otherwise

indicated. Do not use wood, brick, and other unacceptable
materials.
h.3.2 For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or

horizontal runners where abase material will not support
chair leg.
h.3.3 For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of

supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with
either hot-dip galvanized or plastic protected legs.
h.4 Compliance
All bars, wires, and mesh reinforcement shall be certified by the

manufacturer as complying with the above specification and a copy
of the manufacturers test certificate shall accompany each
consignment.
Page 129
h.5 Bending and Cutting
h.5.1 Reinforcing bars shall conform to required shapes and

dimensions, with bending and cutting tolerances. In case of
errors, do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a
manner that will injure or weaken the material. Reinforcing
bars shall be sized and shaped at ambient temperature.
h.5.2 Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not

be permitted in the work:
h.5.2.1 Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding

specified fabrication tolerances.
h.5.2.2 Bends or kinks not indicated on the final shop

drawings.
h.5.2.3 Bars with reduced cross-section due to

rusting or other cause.
h.5.3 Bars shall be cropped to length and flame cutting will

not be permitted unless with the approval of the Project
Manager.
i. Formwork
i.1 Exposed Surfaces
Formwork material for faces of exposed concrete surfaces shall be

smooth faced undamaged plywood, metal or other panel type
materials acceptable to the Project Manager, to provide straight,
smooth, as-cast surfaces that have no discoloration.
i.2 Unexposed Surfaces
Formwork material for faces of concrete surfaces concealed from

view or to be covered with plaster are to be timber/plywood of
sufficiently sound grade, or be of metal or other type panel material.
In whichever case the quality or condition of the materials used shall
be acceptable to the Project Manager.
The face of concrete where plaster is to be applied shall have

sufficient mechanical bond produced by the formwork.
i.3 Material Strength
Provide formwork face material with sufficient thickness to

withstand the pressure of newly placed concrete without excessive
and objectionable bow or deflection.
Page 130
j. Formwork Ties
j.1 Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or

snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent deflection and spilling
concrete surfaces upon removal.
j.2 Provide ties so that the portion remaining within the concrete
after removal of exterior parts is at least 3.8 cm from the outer
concrete surface.
j.3 Provide form ties that will not leave a hole larger than 2.5 cm
diameter in the concrete surface.
k. Formwork Coatings
Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond

with stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces requiring bond or
adhesion, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or
curing compounds.
3. Execution
A. General
Concrete for reinforced concrete structure is classified into grade, quality and
slump. The class of concrete shall be specified on the drawings, denoted by
minimum 28 days compressive strength, based on 15 cm diameter x 30 cm height.
Table 1 - Concrete Grade
Concrete
Grade
Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate
5000 psi25 mm.
Table 2 - Slump Values for Concrete Work
Placement of Concrete in: Slump (cm)
Foundation with reinforcement
And foundation footings7.5 +/- 2.5
Slabs, beams, columns,

andWalls
10.0 +/- 2.5
Page 131
B. Concrete Placement
a. General
Place concrete in compliance with practices and recommendations as

herein specified.
b. Placement Schedule
Prior to starting work procedure, a schedule of the planned concreting

activities that include preparation, method of pouring and equipment to be
used. No concreting work shall commence before the Project Manager has
approved this schedule.
c. Concrete Placement and Procedures
c.1 Deposit concrete, continuously or in layers of such thickness

that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened
sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness
within the section.
c.2 If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction

joints as approved by the Project Manager.
c.3 Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete, which is

being integrated, with fresh concrete is still flowing.
c.4 Deposit concrete as neatly as practicable in its final location to

avoid segregation due to re-handling and flowing.
c.5Do not subject concrete to any procedure that will cause

segregation.
c.6 Do not use concrete which becomes ”non-plastic” and

unworkable, or does not meet the required quality control limits, or
which has been contaminated by foreign materials.
c.7 Remove rejected concrete from the site and dispose of it in a

location approved by the Project Manager for that purpose.
c.8 Use chutes for pouring concrete where a drop of more than 2.0
meters is required.
Chute arrangement:
c.8.1 Chutes shall be of steel or PVC and the cross-section

shape shall be v-type. The gradient of chutes shall be 4/10
to 7/10 to avoid material segregation.
Page 132
c.8.2 In cases where concrete must be chuted from a high
elevation, vertical flexible chutes shall be used.
c.9 Pumps may be used only if they can pump the design mix. Do
not add fine aggregate or water to the mix to satisfy needs of a
pumping device.
c.10 Concrete pumps and related piping shall be lubricated by using

mortar just before starting the work.
c.11 The operation of concrete pumps shall not be suspended

longer than 30 minutes when the pumps are filled with concrete.
c.12 Concrete mix should be poured within 1 hour after water has
been added to dry mix.
c.13 If the quality of concrete is damaged by rain, necessary steps

shall be taken as instructed by the Project Manager. If concrete is
to placed when it is raining, full protective measures should be
taken during pouring. When there is heavy rain, pouring of concrete
shall be discontinued.
c.14 No concrete that has partially hardened or has been

contaminated by foreign matter shall be placed in formwork or in
any other part of the permanent work.
c.15 Concrete shall not be “freshened up” with water or re-tempered

in any way.
c.16 Placing concrete in formwork:
c.16.1 Deposit concrete in formwork in even horizontal

layers not deeper than 60cm.
c.16.2 Where placement consists of several layers, place

each layer while the preceding layer is still plastic and
thereby avoid cold joints.
c.16.3 Remove temporary spreaders in formwork when

concrete placing has reached the elevation of such
spreaders.
c.16.4 Only place concrete in supporting elements (e.g.,

walls, and columns) after the concrete of previously placed
lifts is no longer “Plastic”.
c.17 Placing concrete slabs:
Page 133
c.17.1 Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a
continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints,
and/or until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
c.17.2 Consolidate concrete during placement by the use of

approved equipment.
c.17.3 Coarse aggregate should not be visible on the

surface of finished concrete slabs.
c.17.4 Limit the time of vibrating consolidation to prevent

bringing an excess of fine aggregate to the surface.
c.17.5 Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straight

edge and produce a finish free from bumps and hollows.
c.17.6 Do not sprinkle water on the “plastic” surface, and do

not disturb surfaces prior to the start of finishing operations.
c.18 Concrete conveying
Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to the

concrete conveying equipment and to the locations of final deposit,
as rapidly as practicable and by methods, which will prevent
segregation and loss of concrete mix materials. Keep interior
surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes and pump
piping, free from hardened concrete, debris, water, and other
deleterious materials.
c.19 Concrete without formwork
Concrete may be poured without formwork subject to the Project

Manager’s approval. In this case, the minimum cover of concrete to
rebar shall be 7.5 cm.
c.20 Cold water placing (Not Applicable)
c.21 Hot weather placing
When hot weather conditions exist, which would seriously impair

the quality and strength of concrete, place the concrete as follows:
c.21.1 Maintain concrete temperature at time of placement

below 32 degrees Celsius (90 degrees Fahrenheit). Use
chilled mixing water or chopped ice to control concrete
temperature, provided the water equivalent of the ice is
calculated to the total amount of water.
c.21.2 Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap

cloth if the steel becomes too hot. Steel temperature shall
Page 134
not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately prior to
placement of concrete.
c.21.3 Wet forms thoroughly prior to placement of concrete.
c.21.4 Use set-control admixtures in the concrete mix.
C. Consolidation
a. General
a.1 Consolidate all concrete in accordance with provisions of these

specifications.
a.2 Concrete should be thoroughly compacted during the operation

of pouring and carefully worked around the reinforcement,
embedded fixtures and into all corners of the formwork.
a.3 The concrete shall be compacted by the use of mechanical

vibrators. Spare vibrators shall be provided. Vibrators shall not be
used after there is no apparent decrease in the volume of concrete
and under no circumstances should they be allowed to cause
segregation.
a.4 In tamping, the height of a layer is to be less than 30 cm. For

monolithic construction, each concrete layer shall be poured while
the underlying layer is still responsive to vibration.
a.5 During an operation of concrete placement, a frequency of

vibration shall not be less that 7,000 per minute per internal vibrator
or otherwise specified by the Project Manager.
a.6 Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement.
a.7 Vibration shall be applied only at the point of placing freshly

deposited concrete.
b. Procedures
b.1 Limit duration of vibration to the time necessary to produce

satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation of
aggregates.
b.2 Insert the vibrator so as to penetrate the lift immediately below

the one being placed, and manipulate to blend the two lifts.
b.3 Do not insert the vibrator into lower courses that have begun to
set.
Page 135
b.4 Use the vibrator to melt down the concrete as it is being placed,
and use the vibrator to consolidate the mass of concrete.
b.5 In the case of wall construction, assign at least one vibrator and
vibrator-operator to melting down the mix; and assign at least one
other vibrator and vibrator-operator to consolidating the mass of
concrete.
b.6 Spacing between insertions of the vibrator, which is used to

consolidate, shall not exceed twice the radius of action.
b.7 Under no circumstances shall the points of insertions during the

consolidation phase be more than 45 cm. Apart.
b.8 Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the extent
that localized areas of grout are formed. Vibrators shall not touch
reinforcement.
b.9 Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn out of concrete pours

slowly.
c. Maintenance of Vibrators
Initiate a maintenance program for the vibrators to assure that they are
operating at peak efficiency at all times, and to facilitate effective
consolidation of the concrete.
D. Construction Joints
a. General
a.1 The contractor shall ensure that all construction joints are
arranged to minimize the effects of shrinkage. The position and
arrangement of construction joints shall be according to the
drawings, or otherwise that contractor shall show them in complete
detail on drawings submitted to the Project Manager for approval.
a.2 In cases where the use of construction joints is unavoidable,

parting strips shall be provided along the concrete edges to prevent
flow-out of cement paste.
a.3 Construction joints shall be horizontal or vertical. If required in

beams and slabs, they shall be located at the area where the stress
is minimum.
a.4 The surfaces of construction joints shall be cleaned of laitance

and shall be roughened. Before pouring fresh concrete, the surface
shall be thoroughly wetted.
Page 136
a.5 At points where layer concrete strength is specifically required,
cement paste or rich-mix concrete shall be used. Concrete shall be
placed immediately.
b. Isolating Joints in Slabs
Provide isolation joints in slabs at points of contact between slabs and

vertical surfaces where indicated on the drawings. Seal joints with caulking
material approved by the Project Manager.
E. Curing
a. General
a.1 For five days after pouring, concrete surfaces shall be kept
constantly wet and protected from sunlight and rapid drying. This is
to be achieved by spraying water directly on to the concrete surface
or over previously laid curing membrane or material.
a.2 Two days curing shall be applied for miscellaneous concrete

work. The contractor shall submit his proposed methods of curing
for approval by the Project Manager.
a.3 For twenty-four hours after pouring, no person shall be allowed

to walk on the surface of the concrete, even after that period has
elapsed; no shock or vibration shall be applied to the concrete while
it is in a state of hardening.
F. Concrete Finishing
a. General
a.1 The following surface conditions and finishing methods shall

apply unless otherwise specified on drawings. After removal of
formwork, no defective areas shall be repaired without prior
approval from the Project Manager.
a.2 Unless otherwise agreed with the Project Manager, noticeable

bulges or projections shall be removed by chipping or tooling at an
acceptable finish.
a.3 Large honeycombs or other defective areas shall be chipped

out to behind the reinforcing bars. The edges shall be cut straight
from the surface on a slight undercut, to provide a key. These areas
shall then be thoroughly wetted and filled with a cement mortar of
the same color as the cement used in the concrete.
b. Finish of Formed Surfaces
b.1 Rough form finish

Page 137
b.1.1 Provide as-cast rough form finish to formed concrete
surfaces that are to be concealed by finish work or by any
other construction.
b.1.2 Standard rough form finish shall be the concrete

surface having the texture imparted by the form facing
material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired
and patched, and all fins and other projections exceeding 6
mm in the height rubbed down or chipped off.
b.2 Smooth form finish
b.2.1 Provide as-cast smooth form finish for formed

concrete surfaces that are to be exposed to view, or that are
to be covered with a coating material other than cement
plaster applied directly to the concrete.
b.2.2 Produce smooth form finish by selecting form material

to impart a smooth, hard, uniform texture and arranging
them orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams.
b.2.3 Repair and patch defective areas with all fins and other
projections completely removed and smoothed.
b.3 Related unformed surfaces
At top of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish
with a smooth toweled finish.
c. Monolithic Slab Finishes
c.1 Scratch finish
c.1.1 Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that

are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds
for terrazzo tile and other bonded applied cementations-
finish flooring material.
c.1.2 After placing slabs, form the surface to tolerance not

exceeding 6 mm in 60cm when tested by a straightedge.
c.1.3 Uniformly slope surfaces to drains where required.
c.1.4 After leveling, roughen the surface before the final set
using stiff broom brush, or rake.
c.2 Float finish
Page 138
c.2.1 Apply float finish to monolithic slab surface that are to
receive trowel finish and other finishes hereinafter specified,
and to slab surfaces which are to be covered with insulation,
and as otherwise shown on the drawings or in the
schedules.
c.2.2 After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface

further until ready for floating.
c.2.3 Begin floating when the surface water has

disappeared and when the concrete has stiffened
sufficiently to permit operation of a power-driven float, or
both.
c.2.4 Consolidate the surface with power-driven floats, or by

hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units.
c.2.5 Check and level the surface plane to a tolerance not

exceeding 7 mm in 3 meters when tested with a 3 meter
straightedge placed on the surface at not less than two
different angles.
c.2.6 Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
c.2.7 Uniformly slope surfaces to drains where required.
c.2.8 Immediately after leveling, re-float the surface to a

uniform, smooth, and granular texture.
c.3 Trowel finish
c.3.1 Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are

to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and to slab
surfaces that are to be covered by resilient flooring,
carpeting, paint, or other thin film finish coating system.
c.3.2 After floating, begin the first trowel finish operation

using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the
surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved
over the surface.
c.3.3 Consolidate the concrete surface by the final hand

troweling operation, free from trowel marks, uniform in
texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance
not exceeding 7 mm in 3meters when tested with a 3-meter
straightedge placed on the surface at not less than two
different angles.
c.3.4 Grind smoothly those surface defects, which would

show through applied floor covering system.
Page 139
c.4 Non-slip broom finish
c.4.1 Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete

platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on
the drawings or in the schedules.
c.4.2 Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen the

concrete surface by brooming in the direction perpendicular
to the main traffic route. Use a fiber bristle broom.
c.4.3 Coordinate the required finish with the Project

Manager prior to application.
G. Remedial Work to Concrete
a. General
Reinforce or replace deficient work as directed by the Project Manager.
H. Installation of Reinforcement
a. General
Comply with specified standards and for details and methods of fixing
reinforcement and supports, and as herein specified.
b. Fixing Reinforcement
b.1 Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth,
and other materials that reduce or destroy bonding with concrete.
b.2 Position, support, and secure reinforcement against being

displaced by formwork, construction, or concrete pouring
operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners,
bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.
b.3 Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverage for

concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar
supports together with 16 gage wire to hold reinforcement
accurately in position during concrete pouring. Set wire ties so that
twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.
b.4 Install welded mesh reinforcement in as long lengths as

practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh.
b.5 Cover blocks are to be made of properly cured mortar.
b.6 Provide sufficient number of supports and of strength to carry

reinforcement. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 5 cm
beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use
Page 140
supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment
and similar construction loads.
b.7 Splicing shall be carried out by lapping ends, placing bars in

contact, and tight wire tying.
b.8 Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, the following minimum

concrete cover of reinforcement shall apply:
Cover to Reinforcing
Bar
Minimum Cover
Concrete exposed to earth
Pouring with formwork d< or = 16 mm 5 cm
d> or = 19 mmc 6 cm
Pouring without formwork7.5 cm
Concrete not Exposed to Earth
Slabs, walls, joist3 cm
Beams, column 5 cm
Where d = diameter of bars
The minimum concrete cover shall not be less than the diameter of
the bars.
I. Formwork
a. General
a.1 Construct forms complying to the exact size, shape lines, and
dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment,
location, grade, level, and plumb work in finish structures.
a.2 Forms shall not be connected to such temporary facilities as

scaffolds, etc.
a.3 All rubbish, shavings, saw dust, wire clipping, loose concrete
and any other refuse shall be removed from the inner face of the
forms before placing concrete.
a.4 Washout holes shall be provided where necessary to provide

access for cleaning.
Page 141
b. Fabrication
b.1 Formwork shall be substantial and rigid construction to

withstand concrete weights and other working loads without
detrimental amounts of deformation.
b.2 Fabricate formwork for easy removal wherever possible.
b.3 Provide top form for inclined surfaces where the slope is too
steep to place concrete with bottom form only.
c. Assembly and Inspection
c.1 Prior to assembling formwork components or modules for major

concrete structures, it shall be marked for location and elevation to
enable the Project Manager to inspect, check, and approve.
c.2 All formwork shall be inspected by the Project manager prior to

concrete pouring.
d. Support Work
d.1 Erect support work, on brace, and maintain it to safely hold

vertical, lateral, and symmetrical loads applied until such loads can
be supported by in-place construction. Construct support work so
that adjustments can be made for take-up and settlement.
d.2 Provide wedges, jacks, or camber strips to facilitate vertical

adjustments. Carefully inspect support work and formwork during
and after concrete placement operations to determine abnormal
deflection or signs of failure; make necessary adjustments to
produce work of required dimensions.
e. Chamfers
All exposed edges of concrete above ground shall be chamfered 25 mm

with the exception of:
e.1 The top of piers supporting equipment.
e.2 Concrete edges providing direct support for flooring, or to which

steel will be attached for flooring support; and,
e.3 Architectural requirements as indicated on the drawings.
f. Formwork Coatings
f.1 Contact surface of forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated

with form oil compound before reinforcement is placed. Do not allow
excess form oil to accumulate in the formwork or to come into
Page 142
contact with surfaces that will be bonded to fresh concrete. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.
f.2 Form oil shall be approved by the Project Manager prior to use.
g. Installation of Embedded Items
Set and build into the work anchorage devices, piping, boxes, sleeves and
other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or
supported by, cast-I-place concrete. Items are to be set firm and rigid so
that no movement occurs when concrete is being poured.
h. Removal of Formwork
h.1 Formwork shall not be removed without prior approval from the
Project Manager
h.2 Unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager, forms and

support work shall be left in position for the periods stated in Table
3.
Table 3 - Minimum Forming Frame Retention Period
Type of Formwork Minimum Period Before Removal
Vertical formwork to columns
Walls, large beams, footings, and foundations 3 days

Soffit formwork to suspend Slabs and beams 7 days
Props and supports to slabs and Beams 14days
h.3 Do not hammer or pry against concrete surfaces, provide crush

plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces.
i. Re-use of Formwork
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in the work. Split, frayed,
delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be
acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact
surfaces as specified for new formwork. When forms are used for
successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins,
and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to
avoid offsets.
J. Anchor Bolts
a. General
Page 143
a.1 Deformed bolts shall not be used.
a.2 Prior to setting anchor bolts, they shall be cleaned of loose rust,
oil, grease, dust, and other foreign matter, which may reduce
concrete bonding.
a.3 Prior to concrete pouring, anchor bolts secured in place shall be

inspected by the Project Manager, with reference to their positions,
directions, perpendicularity, projection lengths, etc.
a.4 The tolerance for anchor bolts embedment shall comply with
provisions as shown in Table 4.
a.5 Grease shall be applied sufficiently to the portions of anchor

bolts which are not to be embedded, nuts shall be screwed on, and
proper protection such as vinyl or cloth covers shall be provided to
prevent concrete from adhering to the bolts.
a.6 While pouring concrete, care shall be taken so that the anchor
bolts held in place do not move, or any other interference is caused.
a.7 Protect anchor bolts from interference by other concrete related

activities or by other trades.
a.8 Immediately after formwork has been removed, the alignment

of the anchor bolts shall be checked and shall be subjected to
inspection by the Project Manager.
a.9 Generally, the changing of anchor bolt positions shall not be

permissible. If corrections are necessary, they will be subject to the
Project Manager’s approval.
a.10 Bolts extending from foundations shall be protected from being

bent and their threads from being damaged, until corresponding
equipment or structures are installed.
b. Setting of Anchor Bolts
For setting of anchor bolts, the following two methods shall be applied in
conjunction with relevant drawings and/or instructions given by the Project
Manager. If other special methods are to be used the contractor will be
informed by the Project Manager accordingly.
b.1 Method of anchor bolt embedment using jig plates
b.1.1 Method of anchor bolt embedment using jig plates
b.1.2 Jig plates shall be secured in place by using support

structures approved by the Project Manager.
Page 144
b.1.3 The above-mentioned support structures shall be of
sturdy construction so that they can withstand shocks and
impacts due to concrete placement, etc., without moving.
Details of these structures shall be drawn up by the
contractor and shall be subject to approval by the Project
Manager before fabrication.
b.1.4 After jig plates have been inspected and approved by

the Project Manager, they shall be secured accurately in
position horizontally, and in elevation. Setting jig plates shall
be subject to inspection.
b.1.5 Seven days or more after concrete pouring, jig plates

shall be removed with the approval of the Project Manager.
b.2 Method of anchor bolt embedment using wooden or metal bolt

hole forms
b.2.1 Bolt hole forms shall be fabricated by the contractor,

unless otherwise instructed.
b.2.2 Bolt hole forms shall be accurately sized and

positioned and shall be subject to inspection by the Project
manager.
b.2.3 Unless otherwise instructed, bolt hole forms shall be

carefully removed shortly after the concrete has begun to
set.
b.2.4 After the concrete has hardened all protruding bolts

shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter.
K. Marking
After the concrete has hardened, the centerline of foundations shall be clearly
marked on the top surface. Also, a horizontal line at a level 100 mm below the
underside of the structure to be installed (e.g. bottom of base plate) shall be
marked on all the side surfaces of foundations.
L. Tolerances
a. Tolerances of Form
a.1 Variations from the plumb
Deviations in the line and surface of columns, walls, piers, and in

arises:
a.1.1 In any 3m of vertical distance+/- 6 mm
Page 145
a.1.2 Maximum for entire vertical distance+/- 2.5 mm
a.2 Variations from the level
Deviations from the level or from grades indicated on the drawings:
a.2.1 In any 3 m horizontal distance +/- 6 mm
a.2.2 In any bay or in any 6 m horizontal distance +/- 10

mm
a.2.3 Maximum for entire horizontal distance +/- 20 mm
a.3 Variations of span distance between walls, Columns, and

beams +/- 10 mm
a.4 Variations in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams

and in the thickness of slabs and
Walls
-6mm + 10mm
a.5 Footings variation of dimension “in plan” -6mm + 10mm
b. Tolerance of Embedded Items
b.1 Offset+/- 5 mm
b.2 Elevations+/- 5 mm
b.3 Inclination from true in any direction +/- 10 mm
(Vertical elements only)
b.4 The tolerance for anchor bolt embedment is as given in Table 4

hereunder:
Table 4 - Tolerance of Anchor Bolt Embedment
Bolt Size Deviations from Projected Length Perpendicularity

Position at top of
Bolt
Anchor bolts +/- 2.0 mm + 5.0 mm 1/200
under 1 inch - 3.0 mm
Anchor bolts 1 +/- 2.5 mm + 10.0 mm 1/200
inch and over + 5.0 mm
Distances +/- 3.0 mm
between center of
Page 146
grouped anchor
bolt
Note: when stiffener type jigs are used, Table 4 need not be followed with the exception
of projected length.
M. Inspection
a. General
The contractor shall prepare and submit an inspection sheet to the Project
manager for approval.
The above sheet shall be presented to the Project Manager shortly before
the contractor is ready to commence concreting to allow inspection
approval.
b. Concreting Check Items
b.1 Before concreting, check that,
b.1.1 Excavation, formwork, placement of embedded items

and reinforcement are completed;
b.1.2 Protection has been provided if placing during rain;
b.1.3 All water is removed from formwork;
b.1.4 The ambient temperature is within allowable limits

prior to concreting;
b.1.5 Materials are handled and stored as specified; and,
b.1.6 Material samples have been submitted (if required) or

that manufacturers material certificates have been
submitted.
b.2 During concreting, check that,
b.2.1 Batching, mixing, delivering, sampling, and testing

concrete, is following correct procedure;
b.2.2 Concrete is mixed only in amounts of immediate use;
b.2.3 Set concrete is not used ore-tamped;
b.2.4 Concrete is placed without segregation or loss of

material;
Page 147
b.2.5 Concrete is plastic when placed;
b.2.6 Concrete in each lift or section is placed continuously;
b.2.7 Concrete is consolidated by vibrations without

overworking;
b.2.8 Vibrators are not used to transport freshly poured

concrete;
b.2.9 Laitance has been removed from construction joints,

and that joint surfaces have been slushed with grout before
new concrete is placed;
b.2.10 Cast concrete tops and slab work is struck to required

level and floated-off on the disappearance of water sheen;
b.2.11 Finished surfaces are scratched, toweled or broomed

as specified; and,
b.2.12 Placing is finished within the time specified.
b.3 After concreting, check that,
b.3.1 Concrete is cured for the required time and maintained

within the allowable temperature range;
b.3.2 Concrete is protected against mechanical

disturbances, water flow, loafing, shock, and vibration
during curing; and,
b.3.3 On removal of forms, defects and tie holes are

patched, and that fins are removed.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
1. Painting/ Coating
A. General
a. Scope
a.1 this specification covers the general philosophy for coating external
surfaces of structural steel.
B. Coating Philosophy
a. General
Page 148
a.1 all applicable national and local code sand regulations on surface
preparation, coating application, storage, handling, and safety shall be
complied with. All paint manufacturer’s safety instructions and
requirements contained within the Material Safety Data Sheets shall be
followed.
a.2 the coating contractor responsible for the coating work shall ensure that
the latest issues of the product data sheets are available.
a.3 all coating materials shall be delivered and stored in the manufacturer’s
original sealed containers. The contractor shall provide storage to protect
materials from damage due to contamination, rain and adverse high and
low temperatures. Outdoor storage of coating materials and solvents is not
acceptable.
a.4 the coating contractor shall be responsible for the proper disposal of all
surplus, spent, and waste coating materials, solvents, and thinners,
including containers and solvent wipe rags.
b. Surface Preparation
b.1 Mill scale, rust and foreign matter shall be removed to the extent that
the only traces remaining are slight stains in the form of spots or stripes.
The surface shall be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner, clean dry compressed
air or a clean brush.
b.2 Prior to cleaning, all visible oil and grease shall be removed by means
of a suitable solvent by high-pressure water jetting or steam cleaning with,
if necessary, an alkaline cleaning agent. Surfaces, which have been
exposed to a polluted or salt-laden atmosphere, shall be washed down with
clean potable water.
b.3 all welds shall be smooth and free of all weld slag and weld spatter.
b.4 Power and/or hand tool cleaning shall only be used for field repair and
touch ups, where abrasive blasting is not permitted or is impractical.
b.5 for surface preparation of Work Site itself:
St2 Thorough scraping and wire brushing machine

brushing grinding, etc. The treatment shall remove
loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter. Finally, the
surface is cleaned with a vacuum cleaner, clean dry
compressed air, or a clean brush. It should then
have a faint metallic sheen.
St3 Very thorough scraping and wire brushing machine

brushing-grinding, etc. Surface preparation same as
St2, but much more thorough. After removal of dust,
the surface shall have a pronounced metallic sheen.
Page 149
b.6 Prior to application of final coat in field, the contractor shall prepare
surface of previous coats by clean water rinse, light abrading by sand paper
or hand wire brush, followed by solvent cleaning.
c. Application
c.1 Coatings shall be applied within 4 hours after surface preparation and
before rust bloom occurs. Coatings shall not be applied when the ambient
temperature, steel substrate temperature, or coating material temperatures
are outside the range recommended by the coating manufacturer. Coatings
shall not take place under adverse weather conditions, rain, fog, etc., or
when such conditions are likely to occur before the paint has become dry.
c.2 Surface coated shall be free of all visible dust, oil grease, and other
surface contaminants. All surfaces shall be thoroughly dry prior to painting.
c.3 Before application of the first coat, all areas such as corners, edges
welds, small brackets, bolts, nuts and interstices shall be stripe coated to
ensure that these areas have at least the minimum specified dry film
thickness. Application of stripe coat shall be by brushing. The brushing
technique shall be to brush out and not to flow on the coating material.
Stripe coat material may be sprayed if followed immediately by brushing.
c.4 each coat shall be allowed to cure sufficiently, prior to application of any
subsequent coat.
C. Materials
a. General
a.1 Contractor shall submit recommendations from paint manufacturer as

to the particular name of the paint proposed.
a.2 Products from a single paint manufacturer shall be used for site
painting.
a.3 when a single coating supplier has been specified only material from
that manufacturer shall be used.
a.4 any thinning of coating materials shall be in strict accordance with the
coating manufacturer’s product data sheets and application instructions.
Only solvent recommended by the coating manufacturer shall be used for
thinning.
D. Inspection
a. General
Page 150
All materials, equipment and work shall be available to the Project manager,
including the coating manufacturer’s representative at all times. Contractor shall
employ specialist paint and coating inspectors.
b. Inspection Requirements
b.1 the following inspection functions shall be performed:
b.1.1 Materials
b.1.1.1 Inspect coating and blasting materials upon receipt

of materials.
b.1.1.2 Verify that the storage condition for the materials is

adequate and properly maintained.
b.1.1.3 Verify that the shelf life of coating materials has not
been exceeded.
b.1.1.4 Verify that materials are stored safely and that all
waste is disposed of promptly and safely.
b.1.2 Equipment
b.1.2.1Verify adequacy of coating, cleaning, and

sandblasting equipment.
b.1.2.2 Verify that air supplies for blast cleaning, pneumatic

tools, and spray equipment are free of moisture and oil.
b.1.3 Surface Preparation
b.1.3.1 Confirm that surface preparation takes place when

atmospheric conditions are as specified.
b.1.3.2 Inspect correctness of surface preparation for

specified cleanliness and anchor profile.
b.1.4 Application
b.1.4.1 Verify that correctness of mixing; including

screening of inorganic zinc rich primers and any required
induction time is complied with.
b.1.4.2 Verify that application takes place during proper

specified atmospheric conditions.
b.1.4.3 Verify that inorganic zinc rich paint pot is

continuously agitated.
Page 151
b.1.4.4 Verify that “pot life” is not exceeded.
b.1.4.5 Verify that methods of application are as specified

and of satisfactory standard.
b.1.5 Adhesion
b.1.5.1 Verify that primer is sufficiently cured before

application of the subsequent coats.
b.1.5.2 Inspect surface between the prime and finish coats

to assure bonding between coats.
b.1.6 Repairs
Verify that all repairs have been made. Defective work shall be
corrected at no cost to the Owner.
b.1.7 Cure
Verify that the coating is cured as specified by coating

manufacturer’s instruction for re-coat intervals.
b.1.8 Visual
The finished coating work shall pass visual inspection by the Project
manager. The final coating shall be uniform color and smooth.
Coating work indicating defects, improper application, runs, sags,
damages, and excessive repairs, incomplete curing or excessive
thickness is subject to rejection. It is the coating contractor’s
responsibility to correct work found by these inspections including
conditions discovered after acceptance, which are not in
compliance with these requirements.
2. Fabrication
A. General
a. Description
a.1 Scope
This section covers technical requirements for delivery of raw materials,

mark for identification, packing, crating or otherwise proper preparation for
shipment, and shipping to project site of all structural steel indicated, or
otherwise required for proper completion of the project.
b. Quality Assurance
b.1 Codes and Standards

Page 152
b.1.1 Applicable standards
Unless otherwise specified or shown the following codes and

standards of the latest issue shall apply:
ASTM A 36 Rolled Steel for General Structures
ASTM A 36 Structural Steel
ASTM A325M High Strength Bolts
ASTM A 307 Mild Steel Bolts
ASTM A 563 Nuts
ASTM F 844 Washer
AWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Code
AISC Manual of Steel Construction
AWS A 5.1 Covered Carbon Steel Arc-Welding

Electrodes
c. Submittals
c.1 Product Data
After the award of the contract, the contractor shall submit the following to
the Project manager in timely accordance with the project requirements:
c.1.1 Material Specification
Producer or manufacturer’s specifications for:
c.1.1.1 Structural steel
c.1.1.2 High strength bolts (each type) including nuts and

washers
c.1.1.3 Mild steel bolts and nuts
c.1.1.4 Structural steel primer paint
c.1.1.5 Grating type treads for stairs and their fasteners.
c.1.2 Material Certificates
Certificates verifying that materials or items used in the fabrication

comply with the project’s requirements.
Page 153
c.2 Welding Submittals
c.2.1 General
All welding procedure specifications for each consumable,

preparation, and changes in essential variables shall be submitted
to the Project Manager for approval.
c.2.2 Qualification
The following shall be submitted.
c.2.2.1 Welding procedure specifications
c.2.2.2 Welding procedure qualification test record
c.2.2.3 A list of welding personnel with their respective

qualification records attached.
c.3 Testing and Inspection Submittals
Submit the following:
c.3.1 Testing and Inspection Procedure
c.3.2 Dimensional Inspection Records
c.3.3 Visual inspection of welds (records)
c.3.4 Non-destructive test records
c.3.5 Visual inspection of surface preparation (records)
c.3.6 Test records of dry film thickness of paint
c.4 Drawings and schedules
Prepare the following drawing sand data and submit to the Project Manager
for approval.
c.4.1 Shop drawings
c.4.2 Erection plans
c.4.3 Summary sheets
d. Detailed Requirements for Drawings
Page 154
The contractor shall give the following minimum requirements for shop drawings,
Erection plans, Field Bolt Lists, and any drawings deemed necessary by the
Project Manager.
d.1 General
d.1.1 All shop drawings, erection plans, field bolt lists, and other
drawings shall follow the design drawings of these specifications.
Any deviation there from shall require the written approval of the
Project Manager.
d.1.2 All drawings produced by the contractor shall, be drawn to a

scale such that all information and lettering is legible.
d.2 Reference to Design Drawings
d.2.1 General
Design drawings provide information that is required for the

detailing of the structure. Detailing on shop drawings, plans shall at
all times follow what is the essence of the Design Drawings together
with all requirements herein.
Show all appropriate details on the shop drawings, erection plans,

and other approved drawings to ensure accurate and timely
execution of the work.
If a discrepancy on the Design Drawings is found by the contractor,

the Project Manager shall be immediately informed, in writing, prior
to the preparation of shop drawings.
The contractor shall ensure that he is familiar with all relative

information. If there is doubt regarding any aspect of the Design
Drawings then he shall inform the Project manager in writing without
delay, prior to preparation of shop drawings.
d.2. 2 Connections
Detail connections and joints shall follow the Design Drawings, and
the specifications.
d.3 Shop Drawings
d.3.1 Shop drawings shall give complete detailed information to

enable all component parts to be fabricated for the project.
Information given shall include:
d.3.1.1 Identification marks for members, component parts

of members, and all individual pieces.
Page 155
d.3.1.2 Relevant dimensions of items, including cut length.
d.3.1.3 Locations of all steel parts by means of key plans,

levels, grids, etc.
d.3.1.4 Bolt holes and full connection details.
d.3.1.4 Details of cuts, cope, notches, and chamfers.
d.3.1.5 Detail of camber
d.3.1.6 Offset dimensions from center of columns or center

supporting beams to center of boltholes of supported
beams.
d.3.1.7 Working point to working point dimensions including

inclinations and angles.
d.3.1.8 Direction marks
d.3.1.9Surface treatment requirements
d.3.2 Shop drawings shall specify all procedures necessary for

shop and site assembly.
d.3.3 Applicable welding symbols shall be used in every case and

on no occasion shall they be omitted.
d.3.4 The size of fillet weld shall be given together with the symbol.
e. Detailed Requirements for Drawings
The contractor shall give the following minimum requirements for shop drawings,
Erection plans, Field Bolt Lists, and any drawings deemed necessary by the
Project Manager.
e.1 General
e.1.1 All shop drawings, erection plans, field bolt lists, and other
drawings shall follow the design drawings of these specifications.
Any deviation there from shall require the written approval of the
Project Manager.
e.1.2 All drawings produced by the contractor shall, be drawn to a

scale such that all information and lettering is legible.
e.2 Reference to Design Drawings
e.2.1 General
Page 156
Design drawings provide information that is required for the
detailing of the structure. Detailing on shop drawings, plans shall at
all times follow what is the essence of the Design Drawings together
with all requirements herein.
Show all appropriate details on the shop drawings, erection plans,

and other approved drawings to ensure accurate and timely
execution of the work.
If a discrepancy on the Design Drawings is found by the contractor,

the Project Manager shall be immediately informed, in writing, prior
to the preparation of shop drawings.
The contractor shall ensure that he is familiar with all relative

information. If there is doubt regarding any aspect of the Design
Drawings then he shall inform the Project manager in writing without
delay, prior to preparation of shop drawings.
e.2.2 Connections
Detail connections and joints shall follow the Design Drawings, and
the specifications.
e.3 Shop Drawings
e.3.1 Shop drawings shall give complete detailed information to

enable all component parts to be fabricated for the project.
Information given shall include:
e.3.1.1 Identification marks for members, component parts

of members, and all individual pieces.
e.3.1.2 Relevant dimensions of items, including cut length.
e.3.1.3 Locations of all steel parts by means of key plans,

levels, grids, etc.
e.3.1.4 Bolt holes and full connection details.
e.3.1.5 Details of cuts, cope, notches, and chamfers.
e.3.1.6 Detail of camber
e.3.1.7 Offset dimensions from center of columns or center

supporting beams to center of bolt holes of supported
beams.
Page 157
e.3.1.8 Working point to working point dimensions including
inclinations and angles.
e.3.1.9 Direction marks
e.3.1.10 Surface treatment requirements
e.3.2 Shop drawings shall specify all procedures necessary for

shop and site assembly.
e.3.2 Applicable welding symbols shall be used in every case and

on no occasion shall they be omitted.
e.3.3 The size of fillet weld shall be given together with the symbol.
f. Product Handling
f.1 Delivery and Storage
f.1.1 Deliver all materials to jobsite properly marked to identify the

structure for which it is intended. Marking shall correspond to that
indicated on the shop drawings.
f.1.2 Prepare delivery list showing:
f.1.2.1 All members’ identification marks and quantity
f.1.2.2 Quantity of fasteners
Other necessary information
f.1.3 Fasteners
f.1.3.1 All fasteners shall be delivered in boxes or kegs

marked with labels to the requirements of these
specifications.
B. Execution
Execution in this section covers workshop fabrication of the various members,

components, frames, units, and parts that make up the required steel structures.
a. Fabrication
a.1 General
The workmanship and finish shall conform to this specification.
a.2 Straightening
Page 158
Before marking-off, steel, which enters the shop for fabrication,
shall be checked for conformity with the standards. Any damaged
or distorted material shall be replaced. The method of repair or
correction shall be submitted to the Project manager for approval.
Approval will only be given if it can be shown that the proposed
repair will not reduce the properties of the steel below those
specified.
a.3 Marking-off
a.3.1 The marking-off of steel work including the location

holes may be done manually from what is shown on the
shop drawings, or where a large number of identical items
are required, by the use of previously prepared templates.
a.3.2 The use of chisels or center punches for marking on

materials and those parts of the work, which are prone to
defects by such action, is not permitted.
a.4 Bending
a.4.1 Bending of steel shall be done by a cold process.
a.4.2 The minimum inside bending radius of steel plate shall

be 2.5 times the plate thickness.
a.5 Cutting
a.5.1 Cut dimensions shall be decided by the contractor with

due consideration given to allowance for finishing,
shrinkage which may occur during fabrication.
a.5.2 Steel shall be cut by friction sawing, cold sawing, band

sawing or mechanically guided flame cutting.
a.5.3 The cut edges of member shall be free of gouges,

notches, burrs, and other defects.
a.6 Holing
a.6.1 All bolt holes shall be drilled or otherwise by machine

perpendicular to steel surfaces.
a.7 Assembling
a.7.1 The component parts shall be assembled in such a

manner that they are neither twisted nor otherwise
damaged.
Page 159
a.7.2 All tubular members shall be seal welded to prevent
the access of moisture to the inside of the members. Sealing
plate thickness shall be 6 mm minimum.
b. Welding
b.1 Edge Preparation
b.1 Edge preparation of the weld groove shall be conducted

by machine cutting or mechanically guided flame cutting.
b.2 Surfaces and edges to be welded shall be smooth,

uniform, and free from fins, tears, cracks, and other
discontinuities that would adversely affect the quality or
strength of the weld. Surfaces to be welded and surfaces
adjacent to the weld shall be free from loose or thick scale,
slag, moisture, grease, rust, paint, and foreign material that
invalidate the welding procedure qualification.
b.2 Weld Termination
b.2.1 Welds shall be terminated at the end of a joint in a

manner that will ensure sound welds.
b.3 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage
b.3.1 In assembling and joining parts of a member or built-

up members and in welding reinforcing parts to members,
the procedure and sequence shall be so as to minimize
distortion and shrinkage.
b.3.2 In so far as practicable, all welds shall be made in a

sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding while
the welding progresses.
b.4 Execution of Welding
b.4.1 Welding electrodes shall be properly handled at all

times. Electrodes that possess defects such as peeling of
coating materials, stains, degradation, and humidity, rust
shall be discarded.
b.4.2 Back-gouging as necessary shall be made on the first

layer in the groove root such that welding defects are
removed with minimum loss of sound metal.
b.4.3 At corners and edges of a fillet weld or partial

penetration weld, welding shall be made continuously
around the corner without cessation of arc generation.
Page 160
b.5 Weld Cleaning
b.5.1 In-process cleaning
Before welding over previously deposited metal, all slag

shall be removed and the weld and adjacent base metal
shall be brushed clean. This requirement shall apply not
only to successive layers but also to successive beads and
the crater when welding is resumed after any interruption.
b.5.2 Cleaning of completed welds
Slag shall be removed from all completed welds. The weld

and adjacent base metal shall be cleaned by mechanical
wire brushing or other approved method.
Spatter remaining after the cleaning operations shall be

removed by chipping.
b.6 Repairs
b.6.1 Before any attempt is made to straighten or correct

distorted steel, contractor shall submit a detailed procedure
or work method to the Project Manager for approval.
b.6.2 Removal of weld metal or portions of the base metal

may be by machining, grinding, chipping, or air carbon arc
gouging.
b.6.3 Unacceptable portions of the weld shall be removed

without substantial removal of the base metal.
b.6.4 Additional weld metal to compensate for any

deficiency in size shall be deposited using an electrode
smaller than that used for making original weld, and not
more than 4 mm in diameter.
b.6.5 Overlay or excessive convexity shall be removed.
b.6.6 For excessive concavity of weld or crater, undersize

welds, and undercutting, additional weld metal shall be
deposited after cleaning the surfaces.
b.6.7 For excessive weld porosity, excessive slag inclusions

and incomplete fusion, unacceptable portions shall be
removed and the area re-welded.
b.6.8 For cracks in weld or base metal, the extent of the

crack shall be ascertained by use of acid etching, magnetic
particle inspection, dye penetrant inspection, or other
Page 161
equally positive means. The crack and sound metal 50 mm
beyond each end of the crack shall be removed and the area
re-welded.
b.6.9 Members distorted by welding shall be straightened by

mechanical means or by carefully controlled application of a
limited amount of located heat.
3. Steel Erection
A. General
a. Description
a.1 Scope
This section gives the requirements for erection and inspection of steel
structures of the project.
b. Quality Assurance
b.1 Qualification of Welding
b.1.1 All qualification test records and qualified welder’s list are not
to be confirmed by the designated inspector.
b.1.2 Welders who make any defective weld during the work are not
to be allowed to continue welding.
b.1.3 Before welding, verify welding procedures, welding operations

and welder’s certificates of qualification.
b.2 Surveying and Setting Out
b.2.1 Survey elevations and locations of base plates and anchor

bolts to receive structural steel.
b.2.2 Survey structural members concurrently with the erection

progress.
b.2.3 Show final elevation and location of all major members.
b.2.4 Show all discrepancies between actual installation and the

shop and design drawings.
b.2.5 Take field measurements and examine related work that may
affect erection.
c. Submittal
Page 162
c.1 Product Data
c.1.1 Submit complete material list of items proposed to be

furnished and installed under this section.
c.1.2 Submit manufacturer’s data on proposed shrinkage-resistant

grout.
c.2 Erection Procedure
Descriptive data to illustrate the structural steel erection procedure shall be

submitted to the Project manager including the sequence of erection and
temporary staying and bracing.
c.3 Reports and Records
Submit reports on the following:
c.3.1 Concrete base check
c.3.2 Bolt tightening inspection
c.3.3 Welding procedures specifications
c.3.4 Welder qualification test record
c.3.5 List of welders
c.3.6 Tightness of anchor bolts
c.3.7 Overall dimensional inspection
c.4 Erection data and Procedures
c.4.1 To allow proper scheduling of inspection and testing, provide

an erection schedule to the Project manager in ample time prior to
commencement of field steel erection work.
c.4.2 Report daily all activities and work progress to the Project
Manager.
d. Material Handling
d.1 Delivery
d.1.1 Take delivery of structural steel to be erected and inspect for

damage.
d.2 Checking
Page 163
d.2.1 Any movement of materials shall be under control at all times.
d.2.2 Unload and load trucks by use of cranes or forklifts, do not

unload materials by free fall from trailers or trucks.
d.2.3 Do not drag or tow materials along the ground.
d.2.4 Handle structural elements and other materials utilizing tools

and equipment of adequate safe capacity.
d.2.5 Use hoisting tools.
d.2.6 Handle structural elements using installed lifting hooks or

other appropriate means.
d.3 Storage
d.3.1 Storage areas are to be properly graded, flattened and made

free from water.
d.3.2 Secure all materials to prevent loss or damage.
d.3.3 Keep all areas designated for storage clean and easy access
should be maintained for handling, identification, and inventory.
d.3.4 Separately store materials found to be damaged or defective.

Store at designated location all items, which cannot be repaired.
d.3.5 Store materials according to respective item classification.
d.3.6 Stack steel members on wooden planks, platforms, skids or

other supports and keep completely clear from the ground and
water
d.3.7 Store materials in sheltered areas.
d.3.8 High strength bolts; mild steel bolts and electrodes are to be
stored in watertight and dry places.
d.4 Protection
d.4.1 Use all means to protect steel members and packaged

materials from corrosion and deterioration.
d.4.2 Protect the work and materials from damage by all other
trades.
d.4.3 The threaded portion of anchor bolts shall be cleaned and

greased, and shall be protected from damage by means of hard
type covering.
Page 164
B. Products
a. Materials
a.1 General
Provide all other materials required for completion of erected structural

steel and ensure that materials to be procured in the field are as follows:
a.1.1 Old material having any loss of the effective thickness due to
rust or pockmark on the surface shall not be used.
a.1.2 All distortions of un-worked steel materials and those caused

during transportation of handling shall be corrected by approved
methods.
C. Execution
a. Erection
a.1 General
a.1.1 Prior to starting erection works, the foundations to be used for

the steel structures shall be checked to confirm their location,
orientation, and elevation, also the state of the anchor bolts is to be
checked.
a.1.2 Report serious bends, twists, or other damage in erection

work, in writing to the Project Manager.
a.2 Temporary Support and Staging
a.2.1 Provide temporary support and bracing.
a.2.2 Design, supply and erect necessary false work and staging.
a.2.3 Provide temporary planking and working platforms as

required.
a.2.4 Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of

structural members.
a.2.5 Do not remove staging or platforms before the work is

inspected and approved.
a.3 Setting Bases and Bearing Plates
a.3.1 Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces free from bond-
reducing materials, and then roughen to improve bond to surface.
Page 165
a.3.2 Set loose and attach base plates and bearing plates for
structural members with steel wedges or other adjusting devices.
a.3.3 Clean bottom surface of bearing plates and then roughen to

improve bonding and set and shim the plates utilizing steel wedges
to achieve correct positions and elevations.
a.3.4 Before members are assembled, thoroughly clean all bearing

surfaces.
a.3.5 Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been
positioned and plumbed.
a.3.6 Tolerances in leveling column bases shall be 5 mm.
a.3.7 Application of grout.
a.3.8 Roughening surface of the foundation top shall be made after

all laitance has been removed, in addition oil, grease, dust, sand
and other foreign matter shall be thoroughly removed.
a.3.9 After steel structural frames have been installed on

foundations, grouting works shall be carefully carried out in and
around the base plates and the foundation top surface by
acceptable established methods so as to leave no air pockets.
a.3.10 Grouting work shall not be carried out during heavy rains.
a.3.11 Upon completion of padding or grouting, mortar shall be

properly cured for three days or longer by covering it with mats or
sprinkling with water according to the weather condition.
a.3.12 No load shall be applied for at least three days after padding
or grouting.
a.4 Field Assembly
a.4.1 Clean concrete surface of bond-reducing materials and then

roughen to improve bond to surface.
a.4.2 Accurately assemble structural steel frames to the lines and

elevations indicated and within the specified erection tolerances.
a.4.3 Align and adjust accurately before fastening the various

members of a complete frame or structure.
a.4.4 Repair or replace members which are damaged during

erection, do not secure damaged members in position.
Page 166
a.4.5 Level and plumb individual members of the structure within
tolerances.
a.4.6 Fasten splices of compression members only after the

abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact.
a.4.7 Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevation and alignment.
a.4.8 Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on

the mean operating temperature of the structure.
a.4.9 Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting
fabricating errors in the structural framing.
a.4.10 Where field welding is employed with a high strength bolt

joint for compression, the high strength bolts shall be securely
tightened prior to welding.
a.4.11 Temporary connections
a.4.11.1 Temporary connections for assembling shall be

made using temporary bolts.
a.4.11.2 The quality of temporary bolts for each connection

shall be at least two (2) or one-third (1/3) of the required
number of the bolts for each connection.
a.4.11.3 Replacement of temporary bolts shall be made only

after correction of deviation to the structural steel frames
have been made.
a.4.12 Final bolt tightening shall be made only after checking the
accuracy of the assembled frames.
b. Welding
The welding for main steel members and important joints of steel structures shall
be performed in accordance with the following requirements:
b.1 Welders
Welders shall have sufficient qualifications that have been certified by

means of tests.
b.2 Welding Equipment
b.2.1 To obtain stable welds, welding equipment to be used for

erection work shall have suitable performance for the materials,
sizes of steel members and the shapes of joints.
Page 167
b.2.2 Welding equipment shall always be electrically grounded
when in use.
b.3 Welding Conditions
b.3.1 When wind velocity exceeds 2 m/sec for gas shielded welding
and 10 m/sec for manual arc welding, sufficient screening shall be
provided to protect the welding areas from wind and rains.
b.3.2 Those portions of structural steel members to be welded shall

be completely dry prior to starting.
b.4 Preparations for Welding
b.4.1 Prior to welding, the welding surface of the base metal shall
be cleaned of rust, slag, oil, and other foreign matter, which will
cause defects in the welding.
b.4.2 Electrodes having any defects such as peeling of coating

materials, strains, degradation, humidity, rust, etc., shall not be
used.
b.4.3 Welding electrodes shall be handled and stored carefully in

order to prevent moisture absorption.
b.5 Welding Procedure
b.5.1 Welding shall be carried out in accordance with the specified

type of welds shown on the design drawings.
b.5.2 Welding position shall be flat where possible.
b.5.3 Erectors shall follow a welding sequence that avoids

deformation of structural members and restrictions to other trades.
b.5.4 All slag per each welding layer shall be carefully removed
upon completion of individual welds.
b.5.5 Extension bars or run-off plates shall be cut off min. 3-5 mm
from edges, and shall be ground smooth avoiding damage to the
base metal.
b.5.6 In a full penetration weld, backing strips or back gouging shall

be used where the intention is to attain sufficient penetration. Back
gouging shall always be sufficient, with care taken on the first layer
of the welding root to avoid welding defects.
b.5.6 At corners and edges of fillet welds or partial penetration

welds, the welding shall be made continuously without the ceasing
of arc penetration.
Page 168
b.6 Repair of Weld Defects
b.6.1 Welds having inadequate fusion, insufficient penetration, slag

inclusion, porosity, shall be removed and re-welded.
b.6.2 Where cracks have been found in the course of inspection,

cracked portion(s) and any surrounding area 50 mm from each end
of the crack(s) shall be removed and re-welded.
b.6.3 Undercut, crater, depression, short reinforcement, insufficient

leg length and weld length shall be repaired.
b.6.4 Overlap, excessive reinforcement, and other defective

welding shall be removed.
c. Bolting
c.1 Contact Surfaces
c.1.1 Contact surfaces including filler plates and splice plates shall
be free from paint, scales, burrs, dirt, oil, grease, loose rust and
other foreign matter except tight mill scales.
c.1.2 Shim plates or filler plates having a suitable thickness for the
erector shall furnish joints using high strength bolts where the gap
of the contact surface exceeds 1mm.
c.1.3 Where there is a gradient of 1/20 or larger on the contact

surface tapered washers for bolting shall be provided.
c.2 Tightening Bolts
c.2.1 The “turn-of-nut” method shall be employed for bolt tightening

of high strength bolts.
c.2.2 Calibrated bolt tightening may be used only when installation

procedures are calibrated on a daily basis.
c.2.3 Tightening high strength bolts shall not be carried out on a

rainy day, weather protection shall always be provided for this
operation.
c.2.4 For length of bolts, a projection of two full threads beyond the
units is to be ensured, when in position.
c.2.5 The tightening order of high strength bolts shall be done from
the center outwards.
d. Inspection
Page 169
d.1 Advance Inspection
d.1.1 Steel Materials Check
For fabricated steel members, grating treads and all other

components of erection work, the following inspection points shall
be investigated immediately after arrival on site.
d.1.1.1 Quantities
d.1.1.2 Identification marks
d.1.1.3 Existence of defects
d.1.1.4 Dimensions and sizes including material grade of

bolts.
d.1.2 Concrete Base Check
Prior to erection work, the concrete base to be used for steel

structures shall be checked to confirm the following points:
d.1.2.1 Alignment, levelness and orientation in

relation to approved benchmarks and reference
points.
d.1.2.2 The state of anchor bolt threads.
d.1.2.3 Position, center to center distance, size and

projecting length of anchor bolts.
d.1.2.4 Levelness of padding/ grouting to column

bases.
d.1.3 Embedded Plate Check
Where embedded plates or other embedded steel for structural

members is required all components shall be checked to confirm
the position, dimensions and fitting of the item prior to starting
work.
d.1.4 High strength bolt inspection
Prior to starting erection work, the quality, quantity, size, and grip
length of all high strength bolts shall be inspected to ensure no
failures and shortage, defective bolts shall be reported for
replacement.
e. Inspection of Erection Work
Page 170
e.1 Erection
e.1.1 Before erection, a check for damage in shipment so

that damaged or defective pieces may be repaired or
replaced.
e.1.2 Check anchor bolts as to size, location, elevation, and

for plumb.
e.1.3 Check base plates and grillages for correct assembly

work, levelness, and proper grouping.
e.1.4 Check that columns are plumb and to specified

tolerances before any permanent bolting or welding.
e.1.5 As erection proceeds, match pieces against erection

plan to ensure that steelwork is fixed in the correct position.
e.2 Bolting
e.2.1 Check contact surface of all joints prior to bolting.
e.2.2 Check alignment of holes and bolt size.
e.2.3 The use of filler plates shall be checked to confirm if

they are as specified.
e.2.4 Inspect bolted connections for tightness
e.2.5 The tightening of bolts shall be visually inspected.
e.3 Welding
Checklist of items that influence weld quality before, during and

after welding (please refer to the following pages)
e.4 Testing Requirements of Structural Members
Testing requirements for particular members of steel structures

shall be based on the preceding table with heading Testing
Requirements for Structural Members.
e.5 Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria
Ultrasonic acceptance-rejection criteria shall be based on the given

table herein attached. Please refer to Table 6.2 with heading
Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria.
e.6 Erection Inspection
Page 171
e.6.1 Overall Dimensional Inspection
e.6.2 After erection, completed steel structure, prior

to welding and final bolting, shall be totally inspected
for accuracy of construction and to ensure all
dimensions are as specified.
e.6.3 Inspection records shall be prepared by the

contractor and shall be submitted for
approval.
ITEM 605 ROAD SIGN
605(2) Regulatory Signs
605(3) Informatory Signs
1. Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing road signs in accordance with this
Specification and to the details shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
The road signs shall comply in all respects with the “Philippine International Road Signs
Manual” published by the Department of Public Works and Highways, Manila. The
categories of road signs are designated in the Manual, namely, danger warning signs,
regulatory signs and informative signs, or guide signs. These are referred to in the
Contract as warning signs and informatory signs, respectively.
Road signs shall be classified as standard or non-standard. Standard signs consist of all
warning signs, regulatory signs and informatory signs with the exception of direction signs,
place identification signs and the line. Non-standard signs consist of all informatory signs
which are not classified as standardsigns.
The size of warning and regulatory signs is the length of the side of triangular signs
(measured from the points of intersection of the extension of the edges), the horizontal
width of octagonal signs and the diameter of circular signs.
A. Sign Panels
Sign panels for warning, regulatory, and informatory signs shall be manufactured
from aluminum sheeting at least 3 mm thick.
B. Reflective Sheeting
The reflective sheeting used on the road signs shall consist of spherical lens
elements embedded within a transparent plastic having a smooth, flat surface with
a protected pre-coat adhesive which shall be pressure sensitive for manual
application, or tack free heat activated for mechanical vacuum-heatapplication.
Page 172
The minimum reflective brightness values of the reflective sheeting as compared
to a magnesium oxide (MgO) shall be as given in Table 605.1. The brightness of
the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, shall be not less than 90% of the given
values.
Table 605.1 – Reflective Brightness of Traffic Signs Surfaces
Color Angle of Angle of Minimum Reflective

Incidence Divergence Brightness Value
Compared with MgO
Red -40 0.50 15
200 0.50 10
500 0.50 3
White -40 0.50 75
200 0.50 70
500 0.50 70
Yellow -40 0.50 35
200 0.50 35
500 0.50 10
Blue -40 0.50 6
200 0.50 4.5
500 0.50 0.5
The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to permit application and

adhesion to a moderately embossed surface. It shall show no damage when bent
900 over a 50 mm diametermandrel.
Page 173
The sheeting shall be solvent-resistant so as to be capable of withstanding
cleaning with petrol, diesel fuel, mineral spirits, and turpentine methanol.
The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflectivity after being

subjected to the dropping of a 25 mm diameter steel ball from a height of 2 m into
its surface.
The adhesive shall permit the reflective sheeting to adhere accurately 48 hours
after application of temperatures of up to 900.
The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and, following cleaning in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, shall show no discoloration,
cracking, blistering, peeling or any dimensional change.
Samples of reflective sheeting shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
C. Posts and Frames
Wide flange posts and frames shall be fabricated from structural steel conforming
to ASTM A 283 Grade D. In lieu of wide flange steel posts, the Contractor may use
tubular steel posts conforming to ASTM A 501. All posts shall be thoroughly
cleaned, free from grease, scale and rust and shall be given one coat of rust-
inhibiting priming paint and two coats of gray paint in accordance with Item 411,
Paint.
D. Nuts and Bolts
Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111.
E. Concrete Foundation Blocks
The concrete for the foundation blocks shall be Class A in accordance with Item
405, Structural Concrete and shall be of the size shown on the Plans.
A. Excavation and Backfilling
Holes shall be excavated to the required depth to the bottom of the concrete
foundation as shown on the Plans.
Backfilling shall be carried out by using suitable material approved by the Engineer
and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth. Surplus
excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer.
B. Erection of
Posts
Page 174
The posts shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the
foundation block prior to the placing of the concrete and shall be adequately
supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the placing and
setting of concrete. The posts shall be located at the positions shown on the Plans.
C. Sign Panel Installation
Sign panels shall be installed in accordance with the details shown on the Plans.
Any chipping or bending of the sign panels shall be considered as sufficient cause
to require replacement of the panels at the Contractor’s expense.
The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the signs shall be
painted with enamels matching the background color.
All newly erected traffic road signs shall be covered until ordered removed by the
Engineer.
The quantities of standard reflective warning and regulatory road signs shall be the
number of such signs of the size specified, including the necessary posts and supports
erected and accepted.
The quantities for standard reflective informatory signs and non-standard reflective
informatory signs shall be the number of such, including the necessary posts and
supports, erected and accepted.
5. Basis of Payment
The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 605.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule
which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing road
signs, for excavation, backfilling and construction of foundation blocks, and all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
605 (1) Warning Signs Each
605 (2) Regulatory Signs Each
605 (3) Informatory Signs Each
Page 175
ITEM 606 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
606(1)b1 Pavement Markings (Reflectorized Thermoplastic) – 3.2mm thick
1. Description
This item shall consist of placing markings on the finished pavement. The work shall include
the furnishing of non-reflective or reflective pavement marking paint, whichever is called for
is the Contract, sampling and parking, preparing the surface and applying the paint to the
pavement surface, all in accordance with this specification.
The paints shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the markings shown on the
plans, or as required by the Engineer.
In this Contract the traffic road markings shall be white thermoplastic stripping material
conforming to AASHTO M-249-74.
2.General Requirements
Characteristics:
1.) Appearance in container - in powder or blocks
2.) Condition upon application - shall be in molten state heated to a temperature of

211oC (12.5oF) either way.
3.) Drying Time:
(a) set to bear traffic when applied at air temperature of 10oC (50oF) - 2 minutes max.
(b) set to bear traffic when applied at air temperature of 32oC (90oF) - 10 minutes max.
4.) Bond strength to Portland Cement - 180 psi (1-2 MPa) minimum
5.) Impact Resistance - 10 inch lbs. minimum
6.) Softening point - 102.5oC width a tolerance of 9.5oC (15oF) either way.
7.) Specific Gravity - 2.15 maximum.
8.) The thermoplastic materials shall not exude fumes which are toxic, obnoxious or injurious
to persons or property when it is heated during application.
9.) Application of additional beads by drop-on method shall be at the rate specified by the
Engineer and agreed upon by the applicator/supplier.
10.) Primer shall be used when marking a smooth surface of concrete. Rate of
application of primer shall be at a minimum of 2 grams per sq. meter.
Composition of Thermoplastic Materials
Page 176
Components White
Binder, % 15.0 min
Glass Beads, % 15.0 min
Titanium Dioxide, % 8.0 min
Calcium Carbonate and Inert Fillers, % 55.0 - 75.0 min
Glass Beads (Premix)
1.) Refractive Index - 1.5 minimum
2.) Spheres, % - 90.0 minimum
a.) Passing Sieve #40 (0.425 mm), 95.0 min.

b.) Passing Sieve #70 (0.212 mm), 15.0 min.
Thickness of Marking - 1.5 mm minimum
- Temperature upon application is variable and shall depend on the property of the
thermoplastic material used.
- Amount and type of yellow pigment, calcium carbonate and inert fillers shall be at the
option of the manufacturer provided all other specifications are met.
3.Construction Requirements:
The painting of lane markers and traffic strips shall include the cleaning of the pavement
surfaces, the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, the protection of
pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic, the protection of all parts of the road structure and its
appurtenances against disfigurement by spatters, splashes or smirches of paints or paint
materials, and the supplying of all tools, labor and traffic paint necessary for the entire work.
The paint shall not be applied during rain or wet weather or when the air is misty, or when in
the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are unfavorable for the work. Paint shall not be
applied upon damp pavement surfaces, or upon pavement which has absorbed heat
sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a porous film of paint.
The application of paint shall preferably be carried out by a machine specially made for this
purpose but where brushes are used, only round or oval brushes not exceeding 100 mm in
width will be permitted. The paint shall be so applied as to produce a uniform, even coating
in close contact with the surface being painted.
Traffic paint shall be applied to the pavement at the rate of 0.33 L/m² and shall dry sufficiently
to be free from cracking in from 15 to 30 minutes.
ITEM 624 ROADWAY LIGHTING

Page 177
624(1)a3 Single Arm Post with Street Light
1. General
A. Scope
a. This specification prescribes the technical requirements for street and perimeter
lightings required for operation on a 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz solidly earthed system.
b. The equipment shall be a complete, manufactured assembly consisting of lamp

post, and other items as described in the diagrams and BOQ, that form part of the
material requisition.
c. Lightings shall furnish any special tools for installation and maintenance.
B. References
The Street and Perimeter Lightings and associated materials shall conform to
relevant IEC standards. Each publication shall be the latest revision and
addendum in effect on the date this specification is issued for purchase, unless
noted otherwise. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the
details of the drawings, as a minimum, Work included in this specification shall
conform to the applicable provisions of these publications.
 Philippine Electrical Code Directives

 National and local mandatory regulations
C. Service Conditions
a. Equipment shall have a design life of 25 years.
b. Street and Perimeter Lightings will be installed in outdoor concrete pad in a Phil
Air Force security fencing of Phil Air Force facilities area, less than 100 meters
above sea level. The atmosphere is highly corrosive. The ambient temperature
varies between -100C and +450C. Relative humidity reaches 95% at 350C.
b.1 Satisfactory performance without any damage of any kind to any part
of street for an average temperature of and perimeter lights 350C and
maximum of 450C.
of street and perimeter lights for an average temperature of -50C and
minimum of -150C.
c. Seller shall bring to Buyer’s attention any discrepancy found in this specification.
No deviations shall be made without prior written authorization from Buyer.
D. Technical Requirements
Page 178
a. General
b. General Requirements
b.1 Luminaires shall be spaced to provide glare free illumination of uniform

intensity on the working surfaces and in general arranged for a symmetrical
appearance
E. Street/ Road Lightings
a. Street/Road lighting shall be provided on all permanent metalled roads within

the site plot limits only when it is not possible to provide adequate illumination using
area and security fence.
b. Street/Road lighting installations shall comply with the requirements of PEC
c. Lighting pole shall support luminaires at a minimum clear height of 8 meter

above the finished road surface, Hot Dip Galv, Ga# 14, Octagonal tapered D=158
x D 78, Single arm H=2m overhung L=1.5m Light pole shall be of the hinged
raising and lowering type to provide for luminaire maintenance, without the use of
specialist personnel lifts and to present minimum obstruction to the movement of
wide equipment packages on roadways.
d. Luminaire types and pole spacing shall be selected to achieve the required
levels of illuminance 150Watts HPS, 230Volts, IP56 and provide the most
economic installation.
F. Perimeter Lightings
a. Use shall be made of floodlights for general lighting of outdoor open areas.
Flood lighting luminaires shall be mounted at sufficient elevation and directed so
as not to be objectionable or dazzling to operating personnel. Poles structures
shall be used for mounting such floodlights, but where poles are used, safe access
and a working platform shall be provided for relamping and servicing.
b. Perimeter lighting shall be provided on all permanent area roads within the site
plot limits only when it is not possible to provide adequate illumination using area
and/or perimeter fence floodlighting.
c. Perimeter lighting installations shall comply with the requirements of PEC
d. Lighting pole shall support luminaires at a minimum clear height of 6 meter

x D 78. Light pole shall be of the hinged raising and lowering type to provide for
luminaire maintenance, without the use of specialist personnel lifts and to present
minimum obstruction to the movement of wide equipment packages on roadways.
G. Lighting Control
Page 179
a. The site area lightings street and perimeters, shall be controlled relay by photo-
electric cell with manual over-ride facility.
b. Power Supply from Distribution Panel “DPNL” which are located together at the
transformer pad areas.
H. Specifications Execution of Work
Drawings and documents (herein after called ‘documents’) will be issued to the
CONTRACTOR by the COMPANY for execution of the works. The CONTRACTOR shall
bring to COMPANY’S attention any discrepancy found in the documents. All works shall
be in strict accordance with the latest issue of documents, no deviation shall be made
without prior written authorization from the COMPANY.
a. The CONTRACTOR shall liaise with the COMPANY to clarify any queries
relating to the design intent and to resolve any unforeseen queries that affect the
installation prior to commencement of affected works.
I. Safety
a. Safety of personnel is of prime importance, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure

that all installation activities place personnel safety first.
b. CONTRACTOR shall assess work with regard to risks to the health and safety
of personnel during construction, operation and maintenance of the facilities.
Where practical the risks shall be combated at source, any residual risks remaining
are to be detailed and provided to persons affected. CONTRACTOR shall be pro-
active in raising such issues at regular site meetings to ensure that information is
provided prior to the execution of work and where appropriate it is recorded in the
Health and Safety File.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall produce a detailed method statement for each type
of work operation undertaken. The method statement shall detail the work and
identify any potential safety risks and hazards associated with the work and detail
the safety measures taken to counter them.
d. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that at least one senior electrical employee
who is thoroughly familiar with the class and character of work to be executed is
present at the work site during all working hours.
J. Coordination with Other Trades
a. CONTRACTOR shall Coordinate the installation of equipment with other trades

and schedule work activities to complete the installation in an orderly fashion to
avoid rework. CONTRACTOR shall review of other discipline drawings to ensure
that no conflicts exist in dimensions or location of equipment.
Page 180
b. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordination of all work with all trades.
Any conflicts and interferences shall be brought to the attention of the Owner or
Owner’s representative.
c. CONTRACTOR shall be regularly present during the installation of

process/production equipment by others where there is an electrical tie-in to
ensure that interface junction boxes, conduits etc. are correctly located to enable
the tie-in to be made in the proper manner without giving rise to interference.
K. As-built Documentation
a. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a set of "As-built" documents throughout the

construction period. All of the layout drawings, cable schedules, distribution board
schedules, wiring diagrams, schematic diagrams, single line diagrams and
standard detail drawings, together with the specifications shall be included. The
‘As-built’ documents shall be clearly stamped ‘As-built’, any changes shall be
marked up neatly and accurately as they occur. Each change shall include the
signature of the person making the change, date and the reference number of the
COMPANY’S authorization. The ‘As-built’ documents shall be maintained on-site
in a clean, tidy, orderly manner and be available for inspection by the COMPANY
at all times.
ITEM 807 SITE DEVELOPMENT: LANDSCAPE
807(3)a Softscape (Trees)
807(3)b Softscape (Shrubs)
807(4) Softscape (Grass)
807(6)d Hardscaped Areas
807(6)d Hardscaped (Ponds)
Section 1: PLANT MATERIALS
1. General
A. Scope
This section covers the requirements for plant materials, quality, delivery and
storage requirements.
All trees, shrubs, and ground covers shall have a normal habit of growth and shall
be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect infection.
C. Delivery, Storage and Handling
Page 181
a. Delivery
a.1 Promptly notify Landscape Architects in advance of delivery of

plant materials that will take place.
a.2 Include in itemized list of pertinent data as specified in plantlist.
a.3 Pack plant materials to provide adequate protection against

breakage, injuries during transit. Securely cover top with tarpaulin
or canvass to minimize wind shipping anddrying.
b. Storage
b.1 The Landscape Contractor will be allowed space on the grounds

for the storage of his materials, but he shall provide all necessary
enclosures, which shall be solely responsible for the safe keeping
all plant materials and storedherein.
b.2 These storage rooms or shed shall be moved when so directed

by the Project Manager at the Landscape Contractor’s expense.
After the completion of the work, they shall be completely removed
and all materials taken from thepremises.
c. Handling
c.1 Handle plant in a manner to avoid damage to theplant.
c.2 Protect plant at all times from sun or drying winds. Plant that
cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the
shade, well protected and adequately watered. All specimen, field
grownandfieldstockpalmsandtressshallbeplantedthesamedaytheyd
eliveredtothesite.
2. Products
A. Materials
Unless otherwise indicated, all furnished plants, materials shall be nursery grown,
well-branched, well-proportioned, and containing fibrous rootsystem.
B. Plant list specifying quantities, types and conditions accompanies the

plantingplan.
C. Quantities
Provide sufficient quantities of plant materials needed to complete the work.

Quantities indicated in the plan list are approximately only and are provided for the
convenience of the sub-contractor. The planting plan shall precede over the plant
list.
Page 182
D. Nomenclature
Names of plants shall conform to the name generally accepted in the local nursery
trade, and as interpreted by the Landscape Architect. In all cases of disputes, the
decision of the Landscape Architect shall be final.
E. Consolidated Plant List
a. Plans required
The species (scientific and common name), size, manner in which to be

furnished, and in indication of the approximate number to complete the
planting plan are given in the consolidated plant list. Plant quantities on the
list are indicated only for the convenience of the Landscape Contractor.
The Landscape Contractor shall furnish and plant all plant materials
required by the plans. Surpluses or shortages on the plant list shall not be
used for claims for additional compensations.
b. Substitutions
b.1 Plants of kinds other than those named in the plant list will not be
acceptable unless specifically approved in writing by the Landscape
Architect. Proposed substitute in each case must possess the same
essential characteristics as the type of plant actually specified in regards to
appearance, ultimate height, shape habit of growth and other
requirements. Where the substitution is approved for the Landscape
Contractor’s convenience, plants of greater value may be accepted without
additional cost to theClient.
b.2 The Landscape Contractor of his authorized representative shall be

present during inspection.
b.3 Make a written request to the Landscape Architect a minimum of thirty

(30) working days in advance of all inspections at the nursery. List the
particular plants, which are to be inspected, as well as the size of theplants
c. Special Guarantee
All materials furnished under this section shall be guaranteed as to the

species, hybrid, flower color, and/or variety proposed herein or on the
drawings. If after acceptance, of the project by the Landscape Architect or
his representative, any guaranteed plant materials proves to be of a
different species, hybrid, flower color, and/or variety not initially
determinable, the Landscape Contractor shall replace the plant with a new
plant of the originally specified species, hybrid, flower color and/orvariety.
d. Minor Materials
Accessories or other materials not described but required for completed

work shall conform to commonly accepted industry standards and shall be
Page 183
of types and sizes best suited for the intended purpose and
relatedconditions.
3. Execution
A. Inspection
Plants shall be subjected to inspection and rejection by the Landscape Architect

at place of growth and after delivery for conformity with specifications. All plants
not conforming to specifications will be rejected.
B. Conditions
Trees and shrubs shall have been grown in containers of the size stated on
drawings and/or specifications and shall have sufficient roots to hold the root ball
together after removal from containers without beingroot bound.
The minimum acceptable of the trees and shrubs measured after pruning, with
branches in normal position, shall conform to the measurement specified in the
plantlist.
Plants that meet the measurements specified but do not possess a normal
configuration or balance of height and spread will berejected.
Trees and shrubs larger in size then specified maybe used, but the use of larger
plant materials will make no changes in the contract price. Height shall not be
substituted for balanceform.
Any trees or shrub with a weak, thin trunk not capable of supporting itself when
planted in the open will berejected.
Rooted cuttings shall be healthy, vegetation materials with established roots at one
or morenodes.
C. Installation
Related work specified elsewhere: Section 2.
D. Protection
The Landscape Contractor shall erect such fences or guards as required for the
protection of the public and his materials and maintain same in good repair until
the completion of the entire work under the contract.
Section 2: SOIL PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES
1. General
Page 184
A. Scope
This section covers complete requirements for soil preparation and soil mixes.
B. Submittals
a. Take representative soil samples from the proposed source area. Submit
sample to a recognize laboratory for analysis for requiredfertilizer.
b. Submit test results with schedule of fertilizer to the Landscape Architect

for review. A change of the specified fertilizers may be based on the soil
analysis result.
C. Delivery, Storage and Handling
Fertilizers shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers, each fully labeled,
conforming to the applicable fertilized laws and bearing the names of work of the
manufacturer. Properly notify Owner/ Landscape Architect in advance, the
deliveries of soil materials and mixes that will take place.
2. Products
A. Materials
a. Topsoil
Strip from, well-drained borrow area the top 10cm surface layer of fertile,
friable, natural surface soil, free of subsoil, clouds, shale, organic litter,
trash, toxic substances stones 5cm in maximum dimensions or larger, and
objectionable and hard to eradicate weeds or grasses. Neatly trim grades
for drainage topsoil borrow areas after completion of excavation. Topsoil to
possess characteristics or representative soils in the project vicinity that
produce heavy growth of crops, grass or other vegetation, and contain at
least 6% organic matter determined by loss on ignition on moisture-
freesamples.
Acid range: Between pH 5.0 to 7.0 inclusive.
Mechanical Analysis of the soil.
SIEVE SIZE %PASSING
2.5cm mesh 99-100%
6.0mm mesh 97-99%
No. 100 mesh 40-60%
No. 200 mesh 20-40%
Page 185
b. Commercial Fertilizer
Ammonium sulphate; complete fertilizer: uniform in composition, delivered

to site in unopened original containers, each fully labeled, bearing trade
name or trademark and warranty ofproducers.
c. Manure
Well-rooted, uncleansed animal manure, not less than 8 months and not
more than 2 years old, free of materials not acceptable for landscape use,
and not more than 25% by volume of straw, sawdust or their organic litter
material. Test material and approve for suitability; show certificates.
d. Mulch
Consists of peat as specified above or of forest litter, sawdust, hay, straw

or other collected organic material. Mulches: not to contain sticks larger
than 6mm in diameter, stones, clay or other foreign material preventing
eventual decay of mulch. Mulch harvested with farm-type equipment: use
48 hours after mulching materials has been cut. Forest litter mulch: not less
than 50% decomposed leaf litter, including the natural woodland location
of the leaves or sawdust mulch: add uniformly 3.5kg of ammonium sulphate
or equivalent to each cubic meter ofsawdust.
e. Water
Free from oils, acids, alkali, salt, and other substances harmful to plant
growth. Source of water, service outlets used: subject to approval of
LandscapeArchitect.
3. Execution
A. Preparation of Plant Mixes
a. For use in filling planter boxes, and where specified for backfilling plant
pits and beds; mix in central location on jobsite. Topsoil: thoroughly moisten
peat before mixing with soil. Mix thoroughly; ensure uniform distribution by
blade mixing, by use of soil shredder, by hand or other approved means.
b. Uniformly distribute organic soil conditioner (peat) and the fertilizers

specified by the soil analysis over all plantingareas.
c. Manually tilt the top 150m of all planting areas to evenly incorporate the
amendments into thesoil.
B. Protection
The Landscape Contractor shall erect such fences or guards as required for the
protection of the public and his material and maintain same in good repair until the
completion of the entire work under the contract.
Page 186
C. Clean-up
Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times during the period of the
contract. Clean all construction areas at the end of each day.
Section 3: PLANTING OPERATIONS
1. General
A. Scope
This section covers the requirements for complete planting operation.
All planting operations should be done by men experienced and qualified to do the
job.
2. Products
A. Materials
a. Burlaps
Shall be made of jute and shall weigh not less than 0.2226 kilogram per
square meter. Substitute cloth or materials shall possess an equal strength
and resistance totearing.
b. Stakes for supporting trees
Shall be straight, sound, and rough sawn wood, not less than 5cm. x 5cm.
if square or 7.5m in diameter if round, and 2.50m. long or as otherwise
indicated. Cross braces on stakes: 2.5cm. x 10cm.board.
c. Wires for guying trees
Shall be annealed galvanized steel or steel of gauge hereinafter specified.

Turnbuckles: galvanizediron.
d. Deadmen for anchoring guy wire at ground
Shall not to be less than 5cm.X10cm.Stock, 1.0m in length.
e. Stakes and braces
Shall be stained brown andgreen.
f. Screw eyes
Shall be no.8 brightwire.
Page 187
3. Execution
A. Soil and Drainage Condition
a. Notify the Landscape Architect in writing of all soil and drainage

conditions encountered during planting operations, which the Contractor
considers detrimental to plant materials. Include a cost proposal for the
correction of this problem approved before proceeding towork.
b. If drainage condition of plant pits appears unsatisfactory, test drainage

by filling with water. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting
pit for an excessive period of time shall be brought to the attention of the
LandscapeArchitect.
B. Planting Operation
a. Placement of Non-plant materials
a.1 Landscape Contractor is responsible for checking that the

drainage provision is adequate and functional or otherwise report to
LandscapeArchitect.
a.2 Soiling to be applied in layer of maximum 300mm watered and

slightly compacted to secure against future settlement. Planting
areas to finish grade 50mm below planter top of walllevel.
a.3 Layout of Major Planting. Mark on ground locations for plant and
outlines of areas to be planted. Seek approval of Landscape
Architect before any excavation. Plant shrubs no less than 90cm
from building line unless specifically indicated on drawings or
designated by the LandscapeArchitect.
b. Size of pits
b.1 Minimum depth of pits shall be 0.90m measured from finished

grade. Increased depth as necessary to accommodate ball or roots
and a minimum of 0.15m of compacted topsoil below the ball
orroots.
b.2 Diameter or minimum width of pits for all shrub shall be 0.40m
greater than the diameter of the ball or the spread of the roots, if
barerooted.
b.3 Minimum depth of pits for all shrubs shall be 0.40m measured
from finished grade. Increase depth as necessary to accommodate
balls or roots and a minimum of 0.15m of compacted topsoil below
the balls orroots.
c. Setting Plants
Page 188
Unless otherwise specified, plant in pits sets to such level that, after
settlement, plants will bear the same relation to the finished grade of the
surrounding ground as to the grade of the ground from which plants were
dug. Set trees plumed, rigidly placed in position until soil has been
tampered solidly around the ball or roots.
Use approved topsoil, or soil mixture when indicated, thoroughly settled by

watering, tampering. To compensate for shrinkage, finished grade of
topsoil prior to watering shall be fixed at an elevation 10% higher than the
fill depth desired unless otherwise a shallow saucer approximately 7.5cm
deep around each plant placing a ridge of topsoil around the edge of each
filled-in pit.
d. Balled Plants
Balled and Burlapped and balled and plat formed plant shall be place in a
minimum of 15cm compacted topsoil or prepared soil mixture, tamped prior
to placing plants. Place plants in pit, tamp topsoil or prepared soil mixture
to fill all voids under base around the ball to height of rope, wire, other
wrapping materials from under balls.
e. Bare rooted plants
Properly spread out roots, carefully work in among roots topsoil or prepared
soil mixture as specified. Cut-off clean broken or frayed roots.
f. Container-grown plants
Open, carefully remove container to make earth around roots of plants

remain unbroken. Place in same manner as balled plants.
g. Guying and Staking
Immediately after planting, stake all 2.0m tall and smaller trees. Guy all
large trees asdetailed.
h. Mulching
Within 2 days after planting, place a layer of mulch materials covering entire
area around each plant to a depth of 5 to 7.5cm. if peat is used as much
material, saturate and thoroughly incorporate into top 5cm of thesoil.
C. Protection
c.1 Before excavation, take precautionary measure to protect turfed areas

that area to be trucked over and upon which soil is to be temporarily
stacked pending removal or re-use for the filling of holes, pits, bed.
c.2 Existing trees and shrubbery beds to be preserved. Barricades in a

manner to afford effective protection during planting operations.
Page 189
D. Cleaning
Keep all areas work clean, neat and orderly at all times during the period of the
contract. Clean all planting areas at the end of each day.
Section 4: LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
1. General
A. Scope
This section covers the complete requirement for landscape maintenance.
2. Product
A. Materials
Water. Clean and free from the deleterious substances.
3. Execution
A. Application
a. Watering
a.1 Groundcover Areas
Plants should be kept in a continually dampened condition for at

least 4 weeks. Water with fine spray to avoid washing away any soil
over the roots. Special care should be taken on slope areas to
prevent excessiveerosion.
a.2 Tree and Shrub Areas
Because the roots of the shrubs will not take up much water until
they became fully established in their respective location, irrigate
for long periods each time to allow water to soak down, through the
full depth of the plant hole to the roots. Do not water again until the
feeder roots have sufficient time to take up most of the moisture.
Plant native to the area will probably require less water for
establishment therefore after 4 months limit the watering to once
every otherday.
b. Fertilizing
If any deficiency of nutrients appears during the maintenance period,

consult Landscape Architect for proper fertilizer to be applied to correct
deficiency.
c. Pruning
Page 190
Thinning of plants will be necessary if they become too dense. Pruning
should be handled only by an expert with instructions from the
LandscapeArchitect.
d. Control of pest and diseases
Careful observation should be made to see that no serious pest or diseases

gain a foothold among the materials. In the event any pest or disease occur
consult Landscape Architect immediately for proper treatment.
e. Cultivation and Weeding
If any weeds should appear, such weeds should be removed immediately

before serious consequences occur. By keeping all exposed soil cultivated
to a depth of 2” to 3” weeds will be discouraged and the soil will benefit
from watering because of easy penetration.
ITEM 1001SEWERAGE SYSTEM
Pipe (PVC 150mm Ø, Series 1000) including fittings and accessories)
1. General
A. References
Material requirements, methods, procedures, testing requirements and other related

items called for in this Section shall conform to the applicable standards of the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA), American National Standards Institute,
(ANSI) and American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B. Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Item 2.0, Submittals. Submit within 90 days
after the contract award date and prior to commencing work on the system.
a. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a.1 Pipes and Fittings

a.2. Joints and couplings
b. Shop Drawings
b.1 Precast concrete manholes

b.2 Metal work
Page 191
c. Certificates of Compliance
c.1 Pipe and fittings, including factory-applied linings

c.2 Pipe joint materials
c.3 Cast-iron frames, covers, and gratings
c.4 Precast concrete manhole sections
Submit certificates attesting that tests set forth in each applicable referenced
publication have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be
mandatory or otherwise and that production control tests have been performed at the
frequency or intervals specified in the publication. Other tests shall have been
performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the same type,
class, grade, and size of material as is being provided for the project.
C. Delivery, Storage, and Handling
a. Delivery and Storage
a.1 Piping
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of

handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective
coverings. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside
of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
a.2 Metal Items
Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and

sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility
and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other
objectionable materials.
a.3 Cement, Aggregates, and Reinforcement
Store as specified in Item 17.0, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
a.4 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in a manner to ensure

delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Carry, do not
drag pipe to trench.
A. Pipeline and Culvert Materials
a. Concrete Piping
a.1 Concrete Pipe and Fittings

Page 192
Storm drainage pipe and culvert pipe sizes 300 mm diameter and
larger shall be reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C76,
Class II Wall B. Circular pipe with elliptical reinforcement shall have
a readily visible line no less than 300mm (12 inches) long painted or
otherwise applied on the inside and outside of the pipe at each end
so that when the pipe is laid in the proper position, the line will be at
the center of the top of the pipe. Fittings and specials shall conform
to the applicable requirements specified for the pipe and shall be of
the same strength as the pipe. Cement used in manufacturing pipe
and fittings shall be Type V conforming to ASTM C150.
a.2 Joints
Jointing shall be mortar composed of one part cement and two parts
sand.
b. Concrete Materials
Provide as specified in Item 17.0, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
c. Miscellaneous Materials
c.1 Precast Concrete and Associated Materials
c.1.1 Precast Concrete Manhole Sections
Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops

shall conform to ASTM C478. Base and first riser shall be
monolithic.
c.1.2. Gaskets and Connectors
Gaskets for joints between manhole sections shall conform to

ASTM C443. Resilient connectors for making joints between
manhole and pipes entering manhole shall conform to ASTM
C923.
c.2. Metal Items
c.2.1 Frames, Covers, and Gratings
Unless otherwise indicated, frames and covers shall be cast

iron, traffic type. Figure numbers as indicated. Steel gratings
shall be of commercial grade steel and be of welded
construction.
c.2.2 Drainage Structure Steps
Structural Steps shall be Zinc-coated steed indicated on plan

conforming to ANSI A14.3. As an option, plastic or rubber
Page 193
coating pressure-molded to the steel may be used. Plastic
coating shall conform to ASTM D4101, copolymer
polypropylene. Rubber shall conform to ASTM C443, except
shore a durometer hardness shall be 70 plus or minus 5. For
curb inlets, steel sump ladder rungs as indicated may be used
in lieu of cast-iron steps; rungs shall be zinc-coated after
fabrication. Aluminum steps or rungs will not be permitted.
Steps are not required in manholes, curb inlets, or catch
basins less than 1220mm deep.
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of Pipelines and Appurtenant Construction
a. General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These requirements shall apply to pipeline installation except where

specific exception is made under paragraph entitled "Special
Requirements."
a.1 Location
The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point shown on

the Drawings.
a.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 02200,

Earthworks.
a.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; remove
those found defective from site and replace with new. Provide proper
facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay pipe with the
bell or groove ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust tongues in
grooves to produce a uniform space. Blocking or wedging between
tongues and grooves will not be permitted. Replace by one of the
proper dimensions any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient
space for proper calking or installation of joint material. At the end of
each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks
or bulkheads. Provide batter boards not more than 25 feet apart in
trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as
indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batter boards
for the same purpose.
a.4 Connections to Existing Lines
Notify Engineer in writing at least 10 days prior to date that

connections are to be made. Obtain approval of the Engineer before
Page 194
interrupting service. Conduct work so that there is minimum
interruption of service on existing line.
b. Special Requirements
b.1 Installation of Concrete Piping to the Correct Grade and Alignment
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General

Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the
provisions for rubber gasket jointing and jointing procedures of ACPA
01-103 or of ACPA 01-102, Chapter 9. Make joints with the gaskets
previously specified for joints with this piping. Clean and dry surfaces
receiving lubricants, cements, or adhesives. Affix gaskets to pipe not
more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe. Protect
gaskets from sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all
times. Before installation of the pipe, inspect gaskets and remove and
replace loose or improperly affixed gaskets. Align each pipe section
with the previously installed pipe section, and pull the joint together.
If, while pulling the joint, the gasket becomes loose and can be seen
through the exterior joint recess when the pipe is pulled up to within
one inch of closure, remove the pipe and remake the joint.
c. Concrete Work
Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with Section

03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
d. Concrete Encasement: As shown in the Drawings
e. Manhole, Curb Inlet, and Catch Basin Construction
Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base

sections. After verifying the correct invert elevation, make inverts in
cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete bases with a smooth-surfaced
semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour of the adjacent
drainage sections. For changes in direction of drains and entering branches
into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert of as large a
radius as manhole size will permit. For cast-in-place concrete construction,
either pour bottom slabs and walls integrally or key and bond walls to bottom
slab. For precast concrete construction, make joints between sections with
the gaskets specified for this purpose; install in the manner specified for
installing joints in concrete piping. Give a smooth finish to inside joints of
precast concrete manholes, curb inlets, and catch basins. Parging will not be
required for precast concrete manholes. Cast-in-place concrete work shall
be in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Concrete Work." Make joints
between concrete manholes and pipes entering manholes with the resilient
connectors specified for this purpose; install in accordance with the
recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Where a new manhole is
constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe as required to construct
Page 195
the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends are approximately flush with
the interior face of manhole wall, but not protruding beyond into the manhole.
Use resilient connectors as specified for pipe connectors to concrete
manholes.
f. Metal Work
f.1 Workmanship and Finish
Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be equal to

the best practice in modern structural shops and foundries. Form iron
and steel to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Do shearing
and punching so that clean true lines and surfaces are produced.
Make castings sound and free from warp, cold shuts, and blow holes
that may impair their strength or appearance. Give exposed surfaces
a smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises. Provide
rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for fitting and
support. Apply zinc coating to steel gratings after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A525. Clean surfaces of steel frames and
covers to bare metal by a blasting process. Where surfaces cannot
be cleaned satisfactorily by blasting, clean to bare metal by wire
brushing or other mechanical means. For surfaces contaminated with
rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants, wash with solvents until
thoroughly clean. Immediately after cleaning, coat surfaces with a
coat of primer pretreatment coating, applied to a dry film thickness of
0.3 to 0.5 mil; or apply a crystalline phosphate coating. As soon as
practicable after the pretreatment coating has dried, prime treated
surfaces with a coat of zinc chromate primer, alkalyd type paint
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mils. If primed surfaces
are damaged before removal from the shop, retouch with primer.
f.2 Field Painting
After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps

not buried in masonry or concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust,
grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of
bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.
B. Field Quality Control
a. Field Tests and Inspections
The Engineer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified
in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests and provide labor,
equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be able to produce evidence,
when required, that each item of work have been constructed properly in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.
b. Pipeline Testing
Page 196
Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a
flashlight beam in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light
through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line.
c. Field Tests for Concrete
Field testing requirements are covered in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place

Concrete.
Sewer Manhole
1. General
A. References
Material requirements, methods, procedures, testing and other related items called
for in this Section shall conform to the applicable standards of the American National
Standards Institute, (ANSI) and American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B. Scope of Work
a. Sanitary Sewer Pipeline
Provide new and modify existing exterior sanitary sewer piping and
appurtenances. Construct each system complete and ready for operations.
The work for exterior sanitary sewer system includes furnishing of equipment,
materials, installation, and workmanship as specified and as shown in the
drawings.
C. Submittals
a. Manufacturer’s Catalog Data
a.1 Pipe and Fittings
a.2 Joints and couplings
a.3 Valves
Submit manufacturer’s standard drawings or catalog cuts.
b. Shop Drawings
b.1 Concrete manholes
b.2 Metal works
c. Samples
c.1 Pipes and fittings
Page 197
c.2 Pipe Joint Material
d. Certificates of Compliance
d.1 Pipe and fittings
d.2 Pipe joint materials
d.3 Cast iron frames, covers, and gratings
Cast iron frames, covers, and gratings shall be traffic grade.

Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable reference
publication have been performed, whether specified on that
publication to be mandatory or otherwise. Other tests shall have been
performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the
same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being provided for
the project.
D. Delivery, Storage, and Handling
a.1Piping
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of

handling. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber
gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials
directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt
and debris.
a.2Metal Items
Materials shall be checked upon arrival; identified and segregated as

to types, functions, and sizes. Materials shall be stored off the ground
in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive
rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials.
b. Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure

delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care not
to damage linings of pipe and fittings; if lining is damaged, make satisfactory
repairs. Dragging pipes to trench is not permitted.
A. Gravity Drainage Piping
a. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes
Page 198
The HDPE pipe shall have a minimum size of ɸ150mm I.D. The HDPE pipe
shall be manufactured in a plant capable of providing continuous quality
control through inspection. The facility shall have the necessary testing
equipment to verify that the pipe meets the requirements of AWWA C901 or
C906, NSF Standard #61 and ASTM standards. The facility shall have the
necessary testing equipment to verify that the fittings meet the requirements
of AWWA C901 for sizes ½” to 2” and AWWA C906 for sizes 3” through 54”.
Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from resin meeting the
requirements of the Plastic Pipe Institute as PE 3608. The resin shall meet
the requirements of ASTM D 3350 with a cell classification of 345464C. Pipe
shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D 3035. Pipe shall be DR 11,
150psi working pressure rating (WPR), unless otherwise specified on the
plans. The pipe shall contain no recycled compounds except that generated
in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the
same raw material.
HDPE Resin Specifications
PROPERTY SPECIFICATION UNIT TYPICAL VALUE
Material Designation PPI / ASTM PE3608
Material Classification ASTM D 1248 III C 5 P34
Cell Classification ASTM D 3350 345464C
Density ASTM D 1505 g/cm3 0.955
Melt Index ASTM D 1238 gm/ 10 min 0.11
Flexural Modulus ASTM D 790 psi 135,000
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 psi 3,200
Slow Crack Growth
ESCR ASTM D 1693 hours >5,000
PENT ASTM F 1473 hours >100
HDB @ 73 deg F ASTM D 2837 psi 1,600
UV Stabilizer ASTM D 1603 %C 2.5%
B. Miscellaneous Materials
a. Precast Concrete and Associated Materials
a.1 Precast Concrete Manhole Sections

Page 199
Precast concrete materials manhole risers, base sections, and tops
shall conform to ASTM C478. Base and first rise shall be monolithic.
a.2 Gaskets and Connectors
Gaskets for joints between manhole sections shall conform to ASTM

C443. Resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and
pipes entering manhole shall conform to ASTM C923.
b. Metal Items
b.1Frames and Covers
FS RR-F-621, Cast iron; figure numbers shall be as indicated.
b.2Manhole Steps
Zinc-coated steel as indicated conforming to ANSI A14.3. As an

option, plastic or rubber coating pressure-molded to the steel may be
used. Plastic coating shall conform to ASTM D4101, copolymer
polypropylene. Rubber shall conform to ATM C443, except shore. A
durometer hardness shall be 70 plus or minus 5. Aluminum steps or
rungs will not be permitted. Steps are not required in manholes less
than 1220mm deep.
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of Pipelines and Appurtenances Construction
Apply except where specific exception is made in the following paragraphs

entitled, Specified Requirements.
a.1 Location
The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point indicated

on the drawings. Where the location of the sewer is not clearly defined
by dimensions on the drawings, do no lay sewer line closer
horizontally than 3m (10 feet) to a water main or service line. When
sanitary sewer lines pass above water lines, encase sewer in
concrete for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the crossing, or
substitute rubber-gasket pressure pipe for the pipe being used for the
same distance. Where sanitary sewer lines pass below water lines,
pipes shall be laid so that no joint in the sewer line will be closer than
0.90m (3 feet), horizontal distance, to the water line.
a.2 Earthwork
Page 200
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section on
Earthworks.
a.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing to the Concrete Grade and Alignment
Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace
those found defective and remove from site. Provide proper facilities
for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay non-pressure pipe with
the bells and spigots will not be permitted. Replace by one of the
proper dimensions, pipe or fittings that do not allow sufficient space
for installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close
open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads.
Obtain approval from the Engineer before making connection to

existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of
service on existing line.
b. Manhole Construction
Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base

sections. Make inverts in cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete bases
with a smooth-surfaced semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour
of the adjacent sewer sections only after having verified the correct invert
elevation needed. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering
branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert of as
large a radius as manhole size will permit. For cast-in-place concrete
construction, either pour bottom slabs and walls integrally or key and bond
walls to bottom slab. No parging will be permitted on interior manhole walls.
For precast concrete construction, make joints in concrete piping. Parging will
not be required for precast concrete manholes. Cast-in-place concrete work
shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under paragraph
entitled “Concrete Work” of this section. Make joints between concrete
manholes and pipes entering manholes with the resilient connectors specified
for this purpose; install in accordance with the recommendations of the
construct the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends are approximately
flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not protruding into the
manhole. Use resilient connectors as previously specified for pipe connectors
to concrete manholes.
c. Miscellaneous Construction and Installation
Metal Work
c.1 Workmanship and Finish
Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be equal to

the best practice in modern structural slopes and foundries. Form iron
to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Do shearing and
Page 201
punching so that clean true lines and surfaces are produced. Make
castings sound and free from warp, cold shuts, and blow holes that
may impair their strength or appearance. Give exposed surfaces a
smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises. Provide
necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for fitting
and support.
c.2 Field Painting
After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratins, and steps

not buried in concrete to bare metal or mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and
other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do
not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.
The Owner or his Technical Representative will conduct field inspections and
witness field tests specified in this section. The Contractor shall perform field
tests and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be
able to produce evidence, when required, that each item of work has been
constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
b. Tests for Non-pressure Lines
Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a lighted
flashlight in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light through the
pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line. When pressure piping is
used in a non-pressure line for non-pressure use, test this piping as specified
for non-pressure pipe.
b.1 Leakage Tests
Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or ex-filtration tests, or

by low-pressuring air tests. Prior to testing for leakage, backfill trench
up at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to prevent pipeline
movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe
sufficient to prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit
inspection. When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the allowable
amount specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline
section in the same manner. Correct visible leaks regardless of
leakage test results.
b.1.1 Infiltration Tests
Field testing and allowable leakage shall be in accordance

with the requirements of ASTM C969.
Page 202
Conduct testing from manhole to manhole or between more
than two manholes. The length of main tested shall not
exceed 200 meters.
Stop all dewatering operations and allow the groundwater to

return to its normal level. Infiltration testing should not be used
unless the groundwater level is at least 0.6 meter above the
brown of the pipe for the entire length of the test section.
Plug all outlets discharging into the upstream manhole.

Measure the groundwater elevation and determine average
head over the test section.
Infiltration leakage shall be measured at the outlet of the test

section. Because leakage allowances are small,
measurements are best made by either timing the filling of a
small container of known volume, or by directing flow into a
container for specified time and measuring the content, or by
using wires.
The allowable leakage limit including manholes is 18.5 liters

per mm of internal diameter per km of pipes per 24 hours
when the average head of the test section is 1.8 meter or less.
When the average groundwater head on test section is

greater than 1.8 meter, the allowable leakage should be
increase in proportion to the ratio of the square root of the
average groundwater head to the base head of 1.8 meter.
Manholes may be tested separately and independently with

the allowable leakage of 4 liters per meter of internal diameter
of the pipe per meter of head per hour. If a building or house
leads are connected to the main line being tested, allowance
shall be made for permissible leakage in such leads.
b.1.2 Ex-filtration Test
Conduct testing from manhole to manhole or between more

than manholes. The length of main tested shall not exceed
200 meters.
Determine the groundwater elevation at both ends of the test

sections. If the groundwater level is less than 0.6 meter above
the crown of the pipe measured from highest elevation of the
sewer, ex-filtration test should be used.
Plug all pipe outlets discharging into upstream manhole and

the section outlet, and fill the sewer line with water. At the
upstream manhole, the test head should be established a
Page 203
minimum of 0.6 meter above the crown of the pipe, or at least
0.6 meter above the existing groundwater whichever is higher.
Allow the pipe to remain saturated for a period long enough to

allow water absorption in the pipe, a minimum of 4 hours and
up to a maximum of 72 hours. After the absorption period, refill
the pipe to the required test head.
Measure the leakage loss over a timed test period. The

minimum test period should be 15 minutes and the maximum
should not exceed 24 hours.
The allowable leakage limit including manholes is 18.5 liters

per mm of internal diameter per km of pipes per 24 hours
when the average head on the test section is 0.9 meter or
less.
When the average head on the test section is greater than 0.9
meter, the allowable leakage shall be multiplied by the ratio of
the square root of the average test head and the square root
of the base head of 0.9 meter.
Manholes may be tested separately and independently with

an allowable leakage of 4 liters per meter of internal diameter
of the pipe per meter of head per hour.
ITEM 1002 PLUMBING WORKS
Water Distribution
1. General
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
A. REFERENCES
Material requirements, procedures, methods, testing requirements and other related

items called for in this Section shall conform to the applicable standards of the
American National Standards Institute, (ANSI), American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) and American Water Works Association (AWWA).
B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
a. Water Distribution Mains
Provide water distribution mains, valves and accessories as indicated.
C. SUBMITTALS
Page 204
a. Submittals
a.1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a.1Pipe and fittings
a.2 Joints and couplings
a.3 Valves
a.4 Hydrants
Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts for the listed

items, except submit both drawings and cuts for push-on joints.
Include information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and
couplings.
a.2. Manufacturer's Instructions
a.2.1Installation procedures for water piping
a.3. Samples
a.3.1Pipe and fittings
a.3.2Pipe joint materials
a.4. Certificates of Compliance
a.4.1Pipe and fittings
a.4.2Pipe joint materials
a.4.3Valves
a.4.4Fire hydrants
Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable referenced
publication have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be
mandatory or otherwise and that production control tests have been
performed at the intervals or frequency specified in the publication. Other
tests shall have been performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of
certificates on the same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being
provided for the project.
D. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Page 205
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with
minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective
covering. Store plastic piping and jointing materials, and rubber gaskets under
cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground.
Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
b. Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to

ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special
care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make
satisfactory repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Carry, do not drag
pipe to the trench. Store rubber gaskets [and plastic piping and jointing
materials] that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct
sunlight.
A. Piping Materials
a. Water Distribution Main Lines
a.1 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes
The HDPE pipe shall be manufactured in a plant capable of providing

continuous quality control through inspection. The facility shall have
the necessary testing equipment to verify that the pipe meets the
requirements of AWWA C901 or C906, NSF Standard #61 and ASTM
standards. The facility shall have
the necessary testing equipment to verify that the fittings meet the
requirements of AWWA C901 for sizes ½” to 2” and AWWA C906 for
sizes 3” through 54”.
Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from resin meeting the
requirements of the Plastic Pipe Institute as PE 3608. The resin shall
meet the requirements of ASTM D 3350 with a cell classification of
345464C. Pipe shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D 3035.
Pipe shall be DR 11, 150psi working pressure rating (WPR), unless
otherwise specified on the plans. The pipe shall contain no recycled
compounds except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant
from resin of the same specification from the same raw material.
HDPE Resin Specifications
PROPERTY SPECIFICATION UNIT
Material PPI / ASTM PE3608

Designation
Page 206
Material ASTM D 1248 III C 5 P34
Classification
Cell Classification ASTM D 3350 345464C
Density ASTM D 1505 g/cm3 0.955
Melt Index ASTM D 1238 gm/ 10 min 0.11
Flexural Modulus ASTM D 790 psi 135,000
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 psi 3,200
Slow Crack
Growth
ESCR ASTM D 1693 hours >5,000
PENT ASTM F 1473 hours >100
HDB @ 73 deg F ASTM D 2837 psi 1,600
UV Stabilizer ASTM D 1603 %C 2.5%
a.2 Fittings
HDPE fittings shall be PE3608 HDPE, Cell Classification of

345464C as determined by ASTM D 3350, and approved for use.
Butt fusion fittings shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D
3261. Molded & fabricated fittings shall have a pressure rating equal
to the pipe unless otherwise specified in the plans. All fittings shall
be suitable for use as pressure conduits, and per AWWA C906,
have nominal burst values of three and one-half times the Working
Pressure Rating (WPR) of the fitting.
a.3 Installation
After a section of pipe has been lowered into the prepared trench
and immediately before joining the pipe, the ends of the pipe to be
joined shall be cleaned, and the rubber gasket lubricated, with a
vegetable compound soap all in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer’s instructions. Assembly of the pipe lengths shall be
in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
type of joint used. All special tools and appliance required for joining
the pipe shall be provided by the Contractor. When cutting or
machining of the pipe is necessary, only tools and methods
recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer shall be employed.
b. Water Service Lines

Page 207
b.1 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC Pressure Pipes)
b.1.1 Material and Design
Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C900 and

shall be pressure Class 150. Nominal working pressure be
not less than 150psi. Joints shall be bell and plain ends,
Push-on type rubber gasket joints. Material shall be
homogenously bonded with Ethylene-Propylene Diene
Monomer Rubber.
Mass shall be Lead Free with 90% virgin K-65 grade PVC
resin conforming to PNS 65 and ISO 4422.
b.1.2 Installation
The installation and method of end connections of shall be

as shown on the drawings. All procedures and tools used
shall comply with the recommendations of the manufacturer
and be approved by the Engineer.
c. Service Connection Lines
c.1 Material
The service line piping 30 mm (3/4-in) shall be uPVC as specified

sizes shown on the drawings. Service piping having diameter larger
than 50 mm (2-in) shall be constructed of the same materials
approved for water mains of similar sizes. Small tubing-size service
lines shall have brass fittings as shown on the drawings using cold
flare method or compression type connections and stainless steel
inserts as shown. The brass fittings shall be manufactured
according to AWWA C800. Welded outlets on steel pipe shall be
insulated from brass fittings with nylon brushings approved by the
Engineer.
c.2 Installation
All workmanships shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and approved by the Engineer. Service taps for
plastic service lines shall be made between 45 degrees to 90
degrees from the top of the pipe and the tubing shall be laid in a
serpentine fashion along the service trench bottom to resist pull-
out. Galvanized steel pipe for service lines shall be installed only
where specifically shown on the standard drawings.
Unless otherwise directed, all service lines shall be installed prior to

the hydrostatic test of the water main, and they shall be tested with
pressure test of the water main. Each stop-cock valve shall be
Page 208
operated to thoroughly flush the service and remove any
accumulated air present prior to the hydrostatic test.
d. Service Saddle
d.1 Material
Where saddles are required as shown on the drawings, they shall

be constructed of one or a combination of the following materials
and complying with the requirements as hereunder indicated:
d.1.1 Brass – Leaded red brass, copper alloy with

commercial designation 85-5-5-5 in accordance with ASTM
B584, UNS No. 83000.
d.1.2 Bronze – Silicon bronze in accordance with ASTM

B584, UNS No. 87200.
d.1.3 Ductile iron – Grade 60-40-18 in accordance with

ASTM A536.
d.1.4Cast iron – Grey iron in accordance with ASTM A48,

Class 30.
Service saddles shall be supplied either with:
d.1.A Clamp at least 50 mm (2-in) wide, bolted on each side

or bolted on one side and hinged on the other side.
d.1.B Double or single strap, as shown on the drawings,

each with a width not less than 20 mm (3/4-in).
d.1.C Straps or clamps shall be made of any of the materials

listed above or of steel hot dipped galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A 153 of 18-8 stainless steel.
All parts of the service saddle including the clamp or strap shall
comply with the following minimum thickness requirements:
Pipe Nominal Diameter Thickness

75 mm 8 mm
100 mm 8 mm
150 mm 10 mm
Saddles shall be shaped to the various outside pipe diameters to

which they are to be fitted and shall be provided with an approved
resilient neoprene rubber gasket with a minimum bearing width of
Page 209
12 mm (1/2-in). The tapping thread shall be at least 30 mm deep
and drilled in accordance with iron pipe (I.P.) thread dimensions.
B. Valves, Hydrants, and Other Water Main Accessories
a. Gate Valves
AWWA C500, to AWWA C509, or to UL 262. Unless otherwise specified,

valves conforming to AWWA C500 shall be non-rising stem type with
double-disc gates and mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as
appropriate for the adjoining pipe. Unless specified otherwise, valves
conforming to AWWA C509 shall be non-rising stem type with
mechanical-joint ends. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to UL
262 shall be inside-screw type with operating nut, double-disc or split-wedge
type gate, designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 175 psi, and shall
have mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the pipe
to which it is joined. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the
reference standards specified in AWWA C500.
Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing

boxes shall have 0-ring stem seals and shall be bolted and constructed so as
to permit easy removal of parts for repair. In lieu of mechanical-joint ends
and push-on joint ends, valves may have special ends for connection to
sleeve-type mechanical coupling. Valve ends and gaskets for connection to
sleeve-type mechanical coupling shall conform to the applicable
requirements specified respectively for the joint or coupling. Valves shall be
of one manufacturer.
b. Gate Valves in Valve Pits
AWWA C500, to AWWA C509, or to UL 262. Valves conforming to AWWA

C500 shall be outside-screw-and-yoke rising-stem type with double disc
gates and flanged ends. Valves conforming to AWWA C509 shall be
outside-screw-and-yoke rising-stem type with flanged ends.
Valves conforming to UL 262 shall be outside-screw-and-yoke type, have

double-disc or split-wedge type gate and flanged ends, and be designed for
a hydraulic working pressure of 175 psi. Materials for UL 262 valves shall
conform to the reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Provide valves
with hand wheels that open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem.
Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal
of parts for repair. In lieu of flanged ends, valves may have grooved ends
suitable for grooved type joints. Valves shall be of one manufacturer.
c. Check Valves
Swing-check type conforming to AWWA C508 or to UL 312. Valves

conforming to AWWA C508 shall have iron or steel body and cover and
flanged ends. Valves conforming to UL 312 shall have cast iron or steel body
and cover, shall have flanged ends, and be designed for a working pressure
Page 210
of 175 psi. Materials for UL 312 valves shall conform to reference standards
specified in AWWA C508. Valves shall have clear port opening. In lieu of
flanged ends, valves may have grooved ends suitable for grooved type joints.
d. Fire Hydrant
Wet-barrel type hydrant. Wet barrel type hydrants shall conform to AWWA
C503 or to UL 246, "Wet Barrel" design, and shall have 6-inch inlet, one 4
1/2-inch pumper connection, and two 2 1/2-inch hose connections. Pumper
connection and hose connections shall be individually valved with
independent nozzle gate valves. Inlet shall have mechanical-joint or push-on
joint end, except where flanged end is indicated; end shall conform to the
applicable requirements as specified for the joint. Size and shape of
operating nut, cap nuts, and threads on hose and pumper connections shall
be as specified in AWWA C502 or AWWA C503 or UL 246 or as indicated.
Hydrants indicated as "traffic type," shall have frangible sections as
mentioned in AWWA C502 or breakable features as mentioned in AWWA
C503. Traffic type hydrant shall have special couplings joining upper and
lower sections of hydrant barrel and upper and lower sections of hydrant stem
and shall be designed to have the special couplings break from a force not
less than that which would be imposed by a moving vehicle; hydrant shall
operate properly under normal conditions.
d.1 Valve Boxes
Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping. Valve boxes
shall be of cast iron or precast concrete of a size suitable for the valve
on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Provide a round
head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the
shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Each cast-iron box shall have
a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
d.2 Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings
Design to couple plain-end piping by compression of a ring gasket at

each end of the adjoining pipe sections. Coupling shall consist of one
middle ring flared or beveled at each end to provide a gasket seat;
two follower rings; two resilient tapered rubber gaskets; and bolts and
nuts to draw the follower rings toward each other to compress the
gaskets. The middle ring and the follower rings shall be true circular
sections free from irregularities, flat spots, and surface defects; the
design shall provide for confinement and compression of the gaskets.
Middle ring shall be of cast iron or steel and the follower rings shall be
of malleable iron or ductile iron. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A48
and shall be not less than Class 25. Malleable iron shall conform to
ASTM A47. Ductile iron shall conform to ASTM A536. Steel shall
have strength not less than that of the pipe. Gaskets shall be
designed for resistance to set after installation and shall meet the
applicable requirements specified for gaskets for mechanical joint in
Page 211
AWWA C111/A21.11. Bolts shall be track-head type; bolts and nuts
shall be either of the following: bolts conforming to tensile
requirements of ASTM A307, Grade A, with nuts conforming to tensile
requirements of ASTM A563, Grade A; or round-head square-neck
type bolts conforming to ANSI B18.5 with hex nuts conforming to
ANSI B18.2.2. Bolts shall be 5/8 inch in diameter; Bolts hole in
follower rings shall be of a shape to hold fast the necks of the bolts
used. Do not use mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type
mechanical coupling as an optional method of jointing except where
pipeline is adequately anchored to resist tension pull across the joint.
d.3 Butterfly Valve
The valve shall conform to Class 150B, AWWA C504, short or long
bodies with standard split V-type packing or "O" ring seals.
d.4 Air Release Valves
Air release valves up to and including 75 mm (3-in.) in diameter shall

have threaded connections, except where otherwise shown on the
Drawings, and shall be designed for a working pressure greater than
200 psi. The body shall be of high strength cast iron and the float shall
be of stainless steel. All internal parts, except the seat, shall be
stainless steel or bronze. The valves shall be designed to
automatically permit the escape of accumulated air under pressure
while the pipe is in operation. The valves shall be either direct or lever
operating.
d.5 Tracer Wire for Nonmetallic Piping
Tracer wire shall be bare copper or aluminum wire not less than 0.10
inch in diameter, provided in sufficient length to be continuous over
each separate run of nonmetallic pipe.
A. Installation of Pipelines
These requirements shall apply to pipeline installation except where specific

exception is made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs.
a.1 Location of Water Lines
The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point indicated

on the drawings. Where the location of the water line is not clearly
defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not lay water line closer
horizontally than 3m (10 feet) from any sewer line. Where water lines
cross under gravity sewer lines, encase sewer line fully in concrete
Page 212
for a distance of at least 3m (10 feet) on each side of the crossing,
unless sewer line is made of pressure pipe with rubber-gasketed
joints and no joint is located within 0.90M (3 feet) horizontally of the
crossing. Lay water line which cross sewer force mains and inverted
siphons at least 0.60M (2 feet) above these sewer lines; when joints
in the sewer line are closer than 0.90M (3 feet) horizontally from the
water line, encase these joints in concrete. Do not lay water lines in
the same trench with gas lines fuel lines or electric wiring.
a.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 00220,

Earthworks
a.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in
position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories and maintain in
a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of
pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump
pipe, fittings, valves, or other water line material into trenches. Cut
pipe accurately to length established at the site and work into place
without springing or forcing. Replace by one of the proper lengths
any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper
installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells
and spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with bell
end pointing in the direction of laying.
Grade pipeline in straight lines; avoid formation of dips and low points.
Support pipe at proper elevation and grade, and secure firm, uniform
support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. Lay pipe so
that full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest solidly
on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints,
and couplings. Provide anchors and supports where indicated and
where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper provision
for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of
water until joints have been properly made. At the end of each work
day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or
bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather
prevents installation.
a.4 Installation of Tracer Wire
Install a continuous length of tracer wire for full length of each run of
nonmetallic pipe. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will
not be displaced during construction operations.
Page 213
After approval is obtained, make connections to existing water lines
with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line. Make
connections in accordance with the recommended procedures of the
manufacturer of the pipe being tapped.
b. Installation of Water Mains
b.1 Special Requirements for Centrifugally-Cast Iron Piping (Not

Applicable)
b.2 Installation of Valves and Hydrants
b.2.1 Installation of Valves
Install gate valves conforming to AWWA C500 and UL 262 in

accordance with AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation
and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA
C500. Install gate valves conforming to AWWA C509 in
accordance with AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation
and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA
C509. Install gate valves on PVC water mains in addition in
accordance with the recommendations of AWWA M23 for
appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7,
"Installation." Install check valves in accordance with the
applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting
installation, except as otherwise indicated. Make and
assemble joints to gate valves and check valves as specified
for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe
and fittings.
b.2.2 Installation of Fire Hydrants
Install wet-barrel hydrant in accordance with the requirements

of AWWA C503 for hydrant installation and as indicated.
Make and assemble joints as specified for making and
assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings.
c. Installation of Water Service Piping
All workmanship shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and approved by the Engineer. Service taps for plastic
service lines shall be made between 45 degrees from the top of the pipe, and
the tubing shall be laid in a serpentine fashion along the service trench bottom
to resist pull-out. Galvanized steel pipe for service lines shall be installed only
where specifically shown on the standard drawings.
Where service lines are located under the roadbeds or in stony or rocky
ground, sand bedding shall be provided. The sand bedding shall be of
Page 214
adequate thickness to provide a depth of cover of 0.15 m. Unless otherwise
directed, all service lines shall be installed prior to the hydrostatic test of the
water main, and they shall be tested with pressure test of the water main.
Each stop cock valve shall be operated to thoroughly flush the service and
remove any accumulated air present prior to the hydrostatic test.
d. Disinfection
Flush and disinfect new potable water lines and affected portions of existing
potable water lines in accordance with AWWA C651. Apply chlorine by the
continuous feed method.
The Engineer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified
in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests, and provide labor,
equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce
evidence, when required, that any item of work have been constructed
properly in accordance with the drawings and specifications. Do not begin
testing on any section of a pipeline where concrete thrust blocks have been
provided until at least 5 days after placing of the concrete.
b. Testing Procedure
Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable
specified standard, except for the special testing requirements given in
paragraph entitled "Special Testing Requirements." Test ductile-iron water
mains in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic
testing. The amount of leakage on ductile-iron pipelines with mechanical
joints or push-on joints shall not exceed the amounts given in AWWA C600;
no leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other method.
c. Special Testing Requirements
For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the
maximum working pressure of the system, except that for those portions of
the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter, hydrostatic test
pressure shall be not less than 150 psi. Hold this pressure for not less than
2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested
with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test,
use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of
the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the
same test pressure as the pressure test.
Fire Protection Sprinkler System (AFSS)
Fire Hydrant including bollard
Page 215
1. Fire Hydrants shall be installed in accordance with Philippine Mechanical Code, NFPA,
Local Authority & etc.
2. Fire Hydrants shall be FM & UL approved.
3. Fire hydrants shall be installed at locations specified in approved design drawings.
4. Fire Hydrant shall be class c or equivalent, max 80 deg C, pillar type, meets or exceed
ANSI/AWWA C502 or equal.
5. Fire Hydrant shall have external & internal corrosion protection with high quality coating
capable to high exposed to weather condition.
6. Fire Hydrants supply with standard key tools compatible to BFP standard with chain lock.
7. Fire Hydrants Bolt and nuts shall be electro galvanized coating.
8. Fire Hydrant outlet connection shall be facing directly into BFP access road ways.
ITEM 1100 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION WORKS
1. General
A. Scope
a. This specification prescribes the technical requirements for street and perimeter
lightings required for operation on a 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz solidly earthed system.
b. The equipment shall be a complete, manufactured assembly consisting of lamp

post, and other items as described in the diagrams and BOQ, that form part of the
material requisition.
c. Lightings shall furnish any special tools for installation and maintenance.
B. References
The Street and Perimeter Lightings and associated materials shall conform to
relevant IEC standards. Each publication shall be the latest revision and
addendum in effect on the date this specification is issued for purchase, unless
noted otherwise. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the
details of the drawings, as a minimum, Work included in this specification shall
conform to the applicable provisions of these publications.
 Philippine Electrical Code Directives

 National and local mandatory regulations
C. Service Conditions
a. Equipment shall have a design life of 25 years.
Page 216
b. Street and Perimeter Lightings will be installed in outdoor concrete pad in a Phil
Air Force security fencing of Phil Air Force facilities area, less than 100 meters
above sea level. The atmosphere is highly corrosive. The ambient temperature
varies between -100C and +450C. Relative humidity reaches 95% at 350C.
of street for an average temperature of and perimeter lights 350C and
maximum of 450C.
of street and perimeter lights for an average temperature of -50C and
minimum of -150C.
c. Seller shall bring to Buyer’s attention any discrepancy found in this specification.
No deviations shall be made without prior written authorization from Buyer.
D. Technical Requirements
a. General
b. General Requirements
b.1 Luminaires shall be spaced to provide glare free illumination of uniform

intensity on the working surfaces and in general arranged for a symmetrical
appearance
E. Street/ Road Lightings
a. Street/Road lighting shall be provided on all permanent metalled roads within

the site plot limits only when it is not possible to provide adequate illumination using
area and security fence.
b. Street/Road lighting installations shall comply with the requirements of PEC
c. Lighting pole shall support luminaires at a minimum clear height of 8 meter

x D 78, Single arm H=2m overhung L=1.5m Light pole shall be of the hinged
raising and lowering type to provide for luminaire maintenance, without the use of
specialist personnel lifts and to present minimum obstruction to the movement of
wide equipment packages on roadways.
d. Luminaire types and pole spacing shall be selected to achieve the required
levels of illuminance 150Watts HPS, 230Volts, IP56 and provide the most
economic installation.
F. Perimeter Lightings
Page 217
a. Use shall be made of floodlights for general lighting of outdoor open areas.
Flood lighting luminaires shall be mounted at sufficient elevation and directed so
as not to be objectionable or dazzling to operating personnel. Poles structures
shall be used for mounting such floodlights, but where poles are used, safe access
and a working platform shall be provided for relamping and servicing.
b. Perimeter lighting shall be provided on all permanent area roads within the site
plot limits only when it is not possible to provide adequate illumination using area
and/or perimeter fence floodlighting.
c. Perimeter lighting installations shall comply with the requirements of PEC
d. Lighting pole shall support luminaires at a minimum clear height of 6 meter

x D 78. Light pole shall be of the hinged raising and lowering type to provide for
luminaire maintenance, without the use of specialist personnel lifts and to present
minimum obstruction to the movement of wide equipment packages on roadways.
G. Lighting Control
a. The site area lightings street and perimeters, shall be controlled relay by photo-
electric cell with manual over-ride facility.
b. Power Supply from Distribution Panel “DPNL” which are located together at the
transformer pad areas.
H. Specifications Execution of Work
Drawings and documents (herein after called ‘documents’) will be issued to the
CONTRACTOR by the COMPANY for execution of the works. The CONTRACTOR shall
bring to COMPANY’S attention any discrepancy found in the documents. All works shall
be in strict accordance with the latest issue of documents, no deviation shall be made
without prior written authorization from the COMPANY.
a. The CONTRACTOR shall liaise with the COMPANY to clarify any queries
relating to the design intent and to resolve any unforeseen queries that affect the
installation prior to commencement of affected works.
I. Safety
a. Safety of personnel is of prime importance, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure

that all installation activities place personnel safety first.
b. CONTRACTOR shall assess work with regard to risks to the health and safety
of personnel during construction, operation and maintenance of the facilities.
Where practical the risks shall be combated at source, any residual risks remaining
are to be detailed and provided to persons affected. CONTRACTOR shall be pro-
active in raising such issues at regular site meetings to ensure that information is
Page 218
provided prior to the execution of work and where appropriate it is recorded in the
Health and Safety File.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall produce a detailed method statement for each type
of work operation undertaken. The method statement shall detail the work and
identify any potential safety risks and hazards associated with the work and detail
the safety measures taken to counter them.
d. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that at least one senior electrical employee
who is thoroughly familiar with the class and character of work to be executed is
present at the work site during all working hours.
J. Coordination with Other Trades
a. CONTRACTOR shall Coordinate the installation of equipment with other trades

and schedule work activities to complete the installation in an orderly fashion to
avoid rework. CONTRACTOR shall review of other discipline drawings to ensure
that no conflicts exist in dimensions or location of equipment.
b. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordination of all work with all trades.
Any conflicts and interferences shall be brought to the attention of the Owner or
Owner’s representative.
c. CONTRACTOR shall be regularly present during the installation of

process/production equipment by others where there is an electrical tie-in to
ensure that interface junction boxes, conduits etc. are correctly located to enable
the tie-in to be made in the proper manner without giving rise to interference.
K. As-built Documentation
a. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a set of "As-built" documents throughout the

construction period. All of the layout drawings, cable schedules, distribution board
schedules, wiring diagrams, schematic diagrams, single line diagrams and
standard detail drawings, together with the specifications shall be included. The
‘As-built’ documents shall be clearly stamped ‘As-built’, any changes shall be
marked up neatly and accurately as they occur. Each change shall include the
signature of the person making the change, date and the reference number of the
COMPANY’S authorization. The ‘As-built’ documents shall be maintained on-site
in a clean, tidy, orderly manner and be available for inspection by the COMPANY
at all times.
ITEM 1729 - SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT (STP) - DYNAMIC SEQUENTIAL BATCH

REACTOR (SBR) PROCESS
Sewage Treatment Plant 1 - Process Design, Electromechanical Works, Start-up and

Commissioning of Wastewater Treatment Plant - (CGO 300 CMD)

Commissioning of Wastewater Treatment Plant - (Field Officer 300 CMD)
Page 219
Commissioning of Wastewater Treatment Plant - (HOSPITAL 80 CMD)

Commissioning of Wastewater Treatment Plant - (COMMERCIAL AND ECUMENICAL CHURCH
50 CMD)

Commissioning of Wastewater Treatment Plant - (NCO OFFICERS, CLUBHOUSE, AND
SCHOOL 440 CMD)
1729.1 Description
This Item covers the provision and installation of a complete modular Sewage Treatment Plant
(STP) using Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR) Treatment System.
The proposed treatment is the Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR) aerobic biological system, an
established activated sludge biological cleaning system for all types of Sewage. This treatment
option adapts well to changing and increasing sewage load by changing the cycle periods and
characteristics without the necessity of any new constructions. Ongoing discharge does not
interfere with the settlement of sludge during the liquid/sludge separation process. As a result,
the separation of sludge from cleansed liquid can be achieved at a faster rate, and more efficiently
compared to a settlement tank in a continuous flow system. Treatment system includes (1)
Combined Pre-treatment Process, (2) Secondary Dynamic (SBR) Treatment Process, (3)
Disinfection Process, (4) Aerobic Sludge Digestion Process, (5) Sludge Dewatering
Process.
Minimum performance standards required for (SBR) aerobic biological System are:
(1) Minimum of six (6) hours hydraulic retention time;

(2) Design MLSS of at least 2000 ppm;
(3) Systems using enzymes / bioactive substances by themselves are not acceptable;
(4) Provide proper treatment for sludge management, odor control and disinfection before
discharge
The proposed treatment required with effluent complying with DENR Standards (DAO 2016- 08)
for SB (Sec. 1-Fishery Water Class 11, Sec. 2-Tourism Zones, Sec.3-Recreational Water Class
I) for Marine Waters. Also, RA 9275 otherwise known as the Philippine Clean Water Act.
1729.2 Material Requirements
1729.2.1 Combined Pre-Treatment Process
The objective of combined preliminary treatment is the removal of coarse solids, grit, grease and
other large materials often found in raw Sewage. Removal of these materials is necessary to
enhance the operation and maintenance of subsequent treatment units.
Equipment to use shall include: (1) Combined Pre-Treatment Unit with degreasing and grit
removal process, (2) Manual Bar Fine Screen, (3) Influent Non-contact Doppler Flowmeter, (4)
Page 220
Equalization Submersible Non-Clog Channel Type Transfer Pump with Cutter, (5) Equalization
Wide Band Coarse Bubble Diffusers.
Table 1729.1 - Combined Pre-Treatment Process
Name of Thickness Valid Values Conforming Standard /

No.
Equipment / Sizes Class Others Design Code
This unit shall conform to the following:
Carpentry: Stainless Steel AISI 304 or 316;
Bolts: A2 or A4; Screws: Micro alloy steel;
Combined Pre-
Liners: Bars in Stainless Steel AISI 304 or
Treatment Unit Min. 60 I/s Stainless
316; Greasy matter separation system;
1 with degreasing Output; with Steel AISI 304 2kW, 220V, 1 Ph, 60 Hz
Stainless Steel AISI 304 or 316; Flange:
and grit removal 2mm mesh or 316
Fixing flange in aluminum, parts in contact
process
with the effluent in Stainless Steel AISI 304
or 316; Surface Treatment; pickled and
passivated.
Manual Bar Fine 3.6 m3/min, Mesh Steel
2 PNS SS AISI 304 or 316
Screen 2mm slit size Wire
Influent Non- Stainless
As per flow Certified nonincendive for Class I Division 2,
3 contact Doppler Steel AISI 304 0.01 kW, 220V, 1Ph, 60Hz
requirements Groups A, B, C, D hazardous locations
Flowmeter or 316
Body Cast
Equalization
Min. 76.2 mm Iron FC250, Cable: VCT; Motor Shaft: Stainless Steel
Submersible Non-
Dia or as per Motor Shaft (SUS 420J2); Pump Housing and Impeller:
4 Clog Channel 3.7 kW, 220V, 1Ph, 60Hz
flow design Stainless Cst Iron (FC250); Electric Motor Insulation
Type Transfer
requirements Steel Class: Class F; Enclosure: IP68
Pump with Cutter
SUS4220J2
Min. 24 Holes or
Equalization Wide Stainless
as per flow US Patents 7,674,514; 7,398,499 and
5 Band Coarse Steel AISI 304 10 X 5mm Dia. Holes
design 6,811,148
Bubble Diffusers or 316
requirements
1729.2.2 Secondary Treatment - Dynamic SBR Process
The objective of secondary treatment process is the further treatment of the effluent from primary
treatment to remove the residual organics and suspended solids. In most cases, secondary
treatment follows primary treatment and involves the removal of biodegradable dissolved and
colloidal organic matter using aerobic biological treatment system. Activated Sludge System is
the biological treatment system employed in the existing sewage treatment
plant.
This process includes Dynamic Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR) Process, the pre-treated Sewage
will now be treated in a biological treatment process called Dynamic SBR. Dynamic SBR
incorporates two (2) hydraulic cycle control features that allow you to operate the system in two
(2) basic process modes: Nitrification and De-nitrification. The simple cycle provides half the cycle
for aeration and treatment of the sewage and total of two (2) hours for settle and decant. The
cycles are staggered so one (1) blower can provide air to a pair of basins while ensuring that only
one (1) basin is aerated at any time. If nutrient removal is required, the cycle time is extended to
provide time for anoxic periods to allow de-nitrification and Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
removal. The continual feed provides BOD at all times to provide good de-nitrification rates at all
points in the cycles and optimize nitrogen removal.
This process requires the use of (1) SBR Air Motorized Valve, (2) SBR Turbo Air Blower, (3) SBR
Waste Sludge Non-Clog Submersible Pump, (4) SBR Fine Bubble Diffusers, (5) Floating Decanter
wi motorized valve, (6) Decanter Motorized Valve, (7) Decanter Air Solenoid Valve and (8)
Dissolve Oxygen (DO) Meter.
Page 221
Table 1729.2 - Secondary Treatment - Dynamic SBR Process
Name of Thickness / Valid Values Conforming Standard /
No.
Equipment Sizes Class Others Design Code
Min. 152.4 mm Ductile Iron A536- ISO 12238, Pneumatic fluid power-
SB Air 0.024kW, 220V, 1 Ph,
1 Dia., DN600, 10 65-42-15 Epoxy Directional Control Valves –
Motorized Valve 60 Hz
bar Painted Measurement of shifting time.
Casing Aluminum
ISO 1940, Mechanical vibration -
SBR Turbo Air 21.29 m3/min @ AL 365, Impeller AL 22.4 kW, 440V, 3P,
2 Balance quality requirements for rotors
Blowers 500mbar 7075 Shaft Ti Alloy, 60Hz
in a constant state
Bearing Ni Alloy
Body Cast Iron
SBR Waste Min. 76.2 mm Dia National Electric Code (NEC) or
FC250, Motor Shaft
3 Sludge Non-Clog Bore or as per 2.2 kW, 440V, 3P, 60Hz National Fire Protection Association
Stainless Steel
Submersible Pump design capacity (NFPA) 70
SUS42OJ2
Min. 304,8 mm Polytetrafluoro-
SBR Fine Bubble US Patents 7,674,514; 7,398,499 and
4 DISC or as per ethylene (PTFE) --
Diffusers 6,811,148
design capacity Coated Membrane
Floating Decanter As per design Stainless Steel AISI
5 -- SS AISI 304 or 316
w/ motorized valve requirements 304 or 316
Min. 355.6 mm
Ductile Iron A536- ISO 12238, Pneumatic fluid power-
Decanter Dia. or as per 0.024kW, 220V, 1P,
6 65-42-15 Epoxy Directional Control Valves -
Motorized Valve design 60Hz
Painted Measurement of shifting time
requirements
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., NEMA,
IEEE, and other industrial standards
Min 25.4 mm Dia. Brass for Body,
Decanter Air ASCO Class B, F and H insulation
7 or as per design Stainless for Core 0.008kW, 220V,1P,60Hz
Solenoid Valve systems are UL listed in the
requirements Tube
Recognized Component Index (yellow
book) under Guide No. OBJY2
IEC 61298-2 – Process measurement
and control devices - General methods
Dissolve Oxygen 0-20 mg/L
8 PVC 0.01kW, 220V, 1P, 60Hz and procedures for evaluating
(DO) Meter (1pcjtank)
performance – Part 2 at nominal
operating conditions
1729.2.3 Disinfection Process
The decanted Sewage from the SBR basins will be disinfected using Ultraviolet (UV) Disinfection
Process. This process will instantaneously neutralize microorganisms as they pass through
ultraviolet lamps submerged in the effluent. Treated effluent from the system will be discharged
to the storm drainage or nearest body by gravity. UV Sterilizer and Effluent Flow meter will be
required on this process.
Use Ultraviolet (UV) Disinfection Process or Chlorination Disinfection Process
Table 1729.3 - Disinfection Process

Name of Thickness / Valid Values Conforming Standard / Design
No.
Equipment Sizes Class Others Code
Min. 195 m3/h @ Stainless Steel AISI
Ultraviolet (UV) 254nm, 1cm or as 304 or 316 or High- 2.5kW, 440V, 3 Ph, International Standard against NSF/ANSI
1
Sterilizer per design Density Polyethylene 60 Hz Standard 61
requirements (HDPE)
With type approval after OIML R 49 and verified
according to MI-001 – OD inlet/OD outlet
Carbon Steel ASTM installation; conform to ISO 4064, Water meter for
Effluent Electro Min. 406.4 mm Dia. A 105 for Housing & cold potable water and hot water and EN 14154,
0.01kW, 220V, 1P,
2 Magnetic or as per design Flanges, Stainless Water meter for mechanical f1owmeters; Built-in
60Hz
Flowmeter requirements Steel AISI 304/1 length according to ISO 13359,
4301 Measurement of
conductive liquid flow in
closed conduits
1729.2.4 Aerobic Sludge Digestion Process
Page 222
The excess sludge requires treatment to reduce its water and organic content and to obtain a
stabilized product suitable for end-use or final disposal. Waste sludge generated from the SBR
tank shall be stored and treated by means of biological process called Aerobic Digestion.
Aerobic digestion is a method of sludge stabilization wherein biodegradable organic matter
decomposed at about 50 percent - 80 percent reduction into a relative stable compound and
oxidized some cellular material into C02, H20, and N03. This process is possible by continuous
mixing and oxygenation/aeration using a blower and stainless-steel bubble diffusers.
Process requires the use of (1) Aerobic Sludge Digester (ASD) Wide Band Coarse Bubble
Diffusers, (2) ASD Non-Clog Submersible Transfer Pump/Screw Press Feed Pump, (3) ASD Air
Blower.
Table 1729.4 - Aerobic Sludge Digester (ASD) Process

No.
Aerobic Sludge Min. 24 Holes,
Digester (ASD) L=24" or as per Stainless Steel AISI US Patents 7,674,514; 7,398,499 and
1 10 X 5mm Dia. Holes
Wide Band Coarse design 304 or 316 6,811,148
Bubble Diffusers requirements
ASD Non-Clog
Min. 76.2 mm Dia Body Cast Iron
Submersible National Electric Code (NEe) or
Bore or as per FC250, Motor Shaft
2 Transfer 1.5kW, 440V, 3P, 60Hz National Fire Protection Association
design Stainless Steel
Pump/Screw Press (NFPA) 70
requirements SUS42OJ2
Feed Pump
Min. 26.33 Casing Aluminum
ISO 1940, Mechanical vibration –
m3/min or as per AL 365, Impeller AL
3 ASD Air Blower 30kW, 440V, 3P, 60Hz Balance quality requirements for rotors
design 7075 Shaft Ti Alloy,
in a constant state
requirements Bearing Ni Alloy
1729.2.5 Sludge Dewatering Process
The stabilized and digested sludge from the aerobic sludge digester will be pumped to the
proposed dewatering facility. The dewatering press to be used is combination of thickener and
dewatering press which is known as Volute Screw Press. Volute Dewatering Press eliminates the
need for a thickener, sludge storage, or separate dosing facilities. One (1) duty unit of Volute
Dewatering Press will be provided. The existing Sludge Drying Bed will serve as standby unit in
case the Volute dewatering press is out for maintenance. 2.5 g - 3.0 g polymer/kg of dry solids
will be injected prior to the dewatering press using automatic polymer preparation unit to aid in
the dewatering process. The dewatered sludge cake shall have a dryness of 20 percent -25
percent. The dewatered sludge can be used as an organic fertilizer or for landfill used. This
process requires (1) Sludge reaction Loop, (2) Volute Dewatering Press, (3) Polymer Dosing
Pump, (4) Polymer Stock Solution Tank and (5) Polymer Stock Solution Tank Air Mixing.
Table 1729.5 - Sludge Dewatering Process

No.
Stainless Steel AISI
Sludge Reaction ISO 9001, Quality Management
1 -- 304 or 316 Ti (1.4571) --
Loop System
or HDPE
Min. 15-20 kgjhr
Volute Dewatering Vol. Cap or as Stainless Steel AISI 0.55kW, 440V, 3P, ISO 9001, Quality Management
2
Press per design 304 or 316 Ti (1.4571) 60Hz System
requirements
Min. V6, 31.2 Body Aluminum Die
Polymer Dosing L/hr @ 2 bar or Cast molded 0.048kW, 220V, 1P,
3 EN 31201 (ISO 11201), Acoustics
Pump as per design reinforced by GFRPP 60Hz
requirements (Polypropylene)
Page 223
Polymer Stock As per design Republic Act 9003 or the "Ecological
4 Polyethylene --
Solution Tank requirements Solid Waste Management Act of 2000”
Min. 304.8 mm
Polytetrafluoroethylene
Polymer Solution DISC or as per US Patents 7,674,514; 7,398,499 and
5 (PTFE) Coated --
Tank Air Mixing design 6,811,148
Membrane
requirements
1729.2.6 Odor Control Process
The anticipated odor management will comply with government regulations. The facility will
comply with ISO (International) and DIN (German) standards acceptable to even areas in close
proximity to residential areas, where odor emissions standards are stricter. Principals of odor
management are: (1) No odor is emitted from operations with natural ventilation; malodorous
Sewage is encapsulated in airtight operations. (2) Reliable equipment and backup equipment are
provided.
All manufacturing of equipment process, spare parts and related fittings on this Odor Control
process must conform to the specification & standard of ISO 9001:2008 Quality System: ISO
7005-2, 10631, 185, 1083, 5922, 5752. International standard NSF/ANSI 61 (NSF-61).
1729.2.7 SBR Process Mechanical Piping, Valve, Fittings &. Supports
For every process of the Sewage treatment plant, there is a corresponding mechanical piping,
valves and fitting & structural/mechanical supports to insure the proper process flow of the
system. All piping materials associated with the pumping unit with its fittings shall flange to PN 10
or greater in accordance with ISO 7005-2. Disconnection of the major items of plant shall use
sufficient flanges and unions in order not to disturb the main piping works. Adequate pipe support
must be installed to allow for the removal of any section of pipework during maintenance.
Adequate clamping and guides shall be always being designed and available during construction.
All manufacturing of equipment process, spare parts and related fittings on this SBR mechanical
piping, valves, fittings and supports process must conform to the specification & standard of ISO
9001:2008 Quality System: ISO 7005-2, 10631, 185, 1083, 5922, 5752. International standard
NSF/ANSI 61 (NSF-61), Standard Specification of ASTM: A-48, A-536, A-36, A-27, A-153, A-234,
B-62, 02751, 02661-08, F409-02. Standard Specification of AWWA: C203, C504.
1729.2.8 SBR Electrical, Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Programming &.

Instrumentation
SBR sewage treatment control system based on PLC is introduced to put forward the
technological process and control requirements, the system introduces the composition principle
of the system and the PLC selection and allocation of resources, but also gives a flow chart of
PLC program composition and related settings, demonstrates the SBR sewage treatment method
of PLC control advantages compared with the traditional sewage treatment method.
The SBR manufacturer creates a plant-specific PLC to operate the SBR within specific
parameters for a specific treatment plant. The PLC operates all flows, aeration, valves, timers,
lights, in fact, the entire process. The PLC computer tells the SBR when to switch from one
treatment stage to the next. Once the PLC is on-line and properly programmed, the process
requires little outside input.
Page 224
All manufacturing of equipment process, spare parts and related fittings on this SBR Electrical,
PLC Programming & Instrumentation must conform to the specification & standard of ISO
9001:2008 Quality System: ISO 7005-2, 10631, 185, 1083, 5922, 5752.
1729.3 Construction Requirements
1729.3.1 Installation Requirements
All components of the sewage treatment system such as tanks, pumps, valves, motors/controls
and other similar equipment and appurtenances shall be located and so installed to meet the
requirements for sanitary protection of water quality, hydraulics of the system and protection
against interruption of service by fire, flood or any other hazard. In this case, all equipment shall
be elevated at least 16 cm above finished grade and all floors shall drain in such manner that the
quality of the treated water will not be endangered. Electrical controls shall be located above
grade.
Plug-and-play of individual parts shall be done in good workmanship. Installation shall be

watertight.
Supervision by a representative of the manufacturer shall be provided as to the assembly of all

mechanical equipment/ appurtenances at the time of installation and initial operation.
All its construction & installations shall be in accordance complying with the specification &
standard set of by ISO 9001:2008 Quality System, National Building Code of the Philippines
(NBCP PD 1096) and its IRR, House Bill 3565-2016.
1729.3.2 Water Quality Output Testing Requirements
The Sewage treatment system shall deliver the required treated sewage quality based on RA
9275 otherwise known as the Philippine Clean Water Act as described in Water Quality Guidelines
(WQG) and General Effluent Standards (GES) for Water Environment standard parameters set
forth standards devised by the Philippine National Standards (PNS) prescribed by the Department
of Environment and Natural Resources (DENR) regulations.
Table 1729.6 - Water Quality Guidelines for Primary Parameters

Water Body Classification
No. Unit
AA A B C D SA SB SC SD
Biochemical Oxygen
mg/L 1 3 5 7 15 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Demand (BOD)
Chloride mg/L 250 250 250 350 400 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Color TCU 5 50 50 75 150 5 50 75 150
Dissolved Oxygen (a) mg/L 5 5 5 5 2 6 6 5 2
(Minimum)
Fecal Coliform MPN/100mL <1.1 <1.1 100 200 400 <1.1 100 200 400
Nitrate as N03-N mg/L 7 7 7 7 15 10 10 10 15
pH (Range) 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-9.0 6.0-9.0 7.0-8.5 7.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.0-9.0
Phosphate mg/L <0.003 0.5 0.5 0.5 5 0.1 0.5 0.5 5
Temperature (b) o
C 26-30 26-30 26-30 25-31 25-32 26-30 26.3 25-31 25-32
Total Suspended Solids mg/L 25 50 65 80 110 25 50 80 110
Note: MPN/100mL - Most Probable Number per 100 milliliters

n/a - Not Applicable
TCU - True Color Unit
Page 225
(a) Samples shall be taken from 9:00 AM to 4:00 PM
(b) The natural background temperature as determined by Environment Management Bureau (EMB)
shall prevail if the temperature is lower or higher than the WQG; provided that the maximum
increase is only up to 10 percent and that it will not cause any risk to human health and the
environment.
Table 1729.7 - Water Quality Guidelines for Secondary Parameters-Inorganics

No. Unit
Ammonia as NH3-N mg/L 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.75 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.75
Boron mg/L 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.75 3 0.5 0.5 5 20
Fluoride mg/L 1 1 1 1 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 3
Selenium mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.2
Sulfate mg/L 250 250 250 275 500 250 250 275 500
Table 1729.8 Water Quality Guidelines for Secondary Parameters-Metals (e)

No. Unit
Arsenic mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.04
Barium mg/L 0.7 0.7 0.7 3 4 0.1 0.7 1 4
Cadmium mg/L 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.005 0.1 0.003 0.003 0.005 0.01
Chromium as mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.1
Hexavalent
Chromium (Cr6+)
Copper as Dissolved mg/L 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04
Copper
Iron mg/L 1 1 1 1.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 7.5
Lead mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.1
Manganese mg/L 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 2 0.4 0.4 0.4 4
Mercury mg/L 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.004 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.004
Nickel mg/L 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.2 1 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.3
Zinc mg/L 2 2 2 2 4 0.04 0.05 0.8 1.5
Note: (c) Unless otherwise specified, the above parameters are expressed as total metals.
Table 1729.9 - Water Quality Guidelines for Secondary Parameters-Organics

No. Unit
Benzo(a)pyrene mg/L 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.5 3 0.7 0.7 1.5 3
Barium
Cadmium mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.5 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.5
Chromium as mg/L 0.7 0.7 1 4 5 1 1 4 5
Hexavalent mg/L 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.5 2 0.2 0.2 1.5 2
Chromium (Cr6+) mg/L 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 1.8 0.5 0.5 1.5 1.8
Copper as Dissolved mg/L 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.1 0.2 0.02 0.02 0.1 0.2
Copper mg/L 1 1 1 3 6 1 1 3 6
Iron mg/L <1 1 1 2 5 1 2 3 5
Lead mg/L <0.1 <0.1 0.2 0.5 1 0.3 0.3 0.5 1
Manganese mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.05 0.5 <0.001 <0.001 0.05 0.5
Mercury mg/L <0.025 0.2 0.3 1.5 3 0.3 0.3 1.5 3
Trichloroethylene mg/L 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.9 2 0.07 0.07 0.9 2
Total Organochlorine Pesticide
(f) mg/L n/a n/a 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Aldrin mg/L 0.03 0.03 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Chlordane mg/L 0.2 0.2 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Oichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane mg/L 1 1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Page 226
(DDT) mg/L n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Dieldrin mg/L 0.03 0.03 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Endrin mg/L 0.6 0.6 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Heptachlor mg/L 0.03 0.03 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Lindane mg/L 2 2 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Methoxychlor mg/L 50 50 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Toxaphene mg/L 4 4 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Notes:
CAS - Chemical Abstracts Service
IUPAC - International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry
MBAS - Methylene Blue Active Substances
mg/L - microgram per liter
(d) Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) include nine Aroclors and 19 individual PCB congeners described below:
(e) Phenols include 2-chlorophenol, 2,4-dichlorophenol, and 2,4,6 trichlorophenol
(f) When monitoring for Class AA and A waters, the individual organochlorine pesticides shall be monitored. For Class B, C, 0, SA,
SB, SC and SO; Total Organochlorine Pesticides shall be monitored, which refers to the organochlorine pesticides listed in Table 0.6
plus Benzene Hexachloride (BHe) (a,B,8,y), 4,4' Dichlorodipheyldichloroethane (ODD), 4,4' Dichlorodiphenyldichloroethylene (DOE),
Endosulfan (I,) I, and sulfate).
1729.4 Method of Measurement
The quantity to be paid for will be measured as per individual process detailed below in tabulation
for the complete Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) system as furnished on site and in accordance
with this design standard, specifications and as accepted by the Engineer.
1729.5 Basis of Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 1729.4 shall be paid for at the Contract
Unit Price/set/process for Sewage Treatment Plant System which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, including labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Payment shall be made under:
1729 (1) Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) – Dynamic Lump Sum

Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR) Process
Page 227

Technical Specifications - Site Development 65-Hectare in New Clark City 0420202

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specifications - Site Development 65-Hectare in New Clark City 0420202

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Location: New Clark City

PART A. FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

A.1.1 CONSTRUCTION OF OFFICES AND LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER INCLUDING

DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT

A. Telephone Landline with internet (Subscription 1 each

Standard Cellular Phone 14 Each

A.1.4 (1) Provision of Progress Photographs

PART B. OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B.1 Offices, Shops, Stores, and Workmen’s Accommodation for Contractor

B.4 (1) Construction Survey and Staking

B.4 (2) Slope, reference, and Clearing and Grubbing Stakes

B.4 (3) Centerline Reestablishment

B.4 (6) Retaining Wall Survey and Staking

B.4 (7) Grade Finishing Stakes

B.5 Project Billboard and Signage

B.7 (1) Occupational Safety and Health Program

Staking activities shall be included in the construction schedule to be submitted by the

The Contractor for convenient use of Government-furnished data shall perform

a. Surveying and staking methods

b. Stake marking/concrete monuments

CONSTRUCTION SURVEY AND STAKING TOLERANCES111

Staking phase Horizontal Vertical

Local supplemental control points set from

existing Government network points ±10 mm ±3 mm x VN(3)

Centerline points (4)- (PC), (PT), (POT),

and (POC) including references ±10 mm ±10 mm

Other centerline points ±50 mm ±50 mm

Cross-section points and slope stakes ±50 mm ±50 mm

Slope stakes references Culverts, ditches, ±50 mm ±50 mm

and minor drainage

structures ±50 mm ±20 mm

Retaining walls and curb and gutter ±20 mm ±10 mm

Bridge substructures ±10 mm(6) ±d0 mm

Bridge superstructures ±10 mm(6> ±10 mm

Clearing and grubbing limits ±500 mm -

Roadway subgrade finish stakes <7) ±50 mm ±10 mm

Roadway finish grade stakes <7) ±50 mm ±10 mm

c. Grade control for courses of material

f. Any other procedures and controls necessary for the work

Established controls shall be within the tolerances shown in Table 1.

(1) At 95% confidence level. Tolerances are relative to existing Government

(2) K is the distance in kilometers.

(3) N is the number of instrument setups.

(4) Centerline points: PC - point of curve, PT - point of tangent, POT - point on

(7) Include pave ditches.

In the case of “change" or “changed conditions" which involve any change in

Survey instruments and supporting equipment capable of achieving the specified

C. Survey and Staking Requirements

Established initial horizontal and vertical control points in conflict with

c. Slope Stakes and References

d. Clearing and Grubbing Limits

Centerline shall be reestablished from instrument control points. The maximum

f. Grade Finishing Stakes

g.3 Set the reference points and record information necessary to

j. Borrow and Waste Sites

k. Permanent Monuments and Markers

All survey and staking necessary to establish permanent monuments and

l. Miscellaneous Survey and Staking

l.1 Approach roads and trails

l.3 Curb and gutter

l.5 Parking areas

l.6 Paved waterways and outfall structures